Ibmanager

SQL Manager 2008 for
InterBase/Firebird
User's Manual
© 2008 EMS Database Management Solutions
SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird
User's Manual
All rights reserved.
This manual documents EMS SQL Manager for InterBase/Firebird, version 5.0.x.x
No parts of this work may be reproduced in any form or by any means - graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including
photocopying, recording, taping, or information storage and retrieval systems - without the written permission of the
publisher.
Products that are referred to in this document may be either trademarks and/or registered trademarks of the
respective owners. The publisher and the author make no claim to these trademarks.
While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document, the publisher and the author assume no
responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from the use of information contained in this document
or from the use of programs and source code that may accompany it. In no event shall the publisher and the author be
liable for any loss of profit or any other commercial damage caused or alleged to have been caused directly or
indirectly by this document.
Use of this documentation is subject to the following terms: you may create a printed copy of this documentation solely
for your own personal use. Conversion to other formats is allowed as long as the actual content is not altered or edited
in any way.
Document generated on: 24.01.2008

3 SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird User's Manual
Table of Contents
Part I Welcome to SQL Manager for IB/FB! 14

What's new
...........................................................................................................................................15
System requirements
...........................................................................................................................................17
Feature Matrix
...........................................................................................................................................18
Installation
...........................................................................................................................................19
Registration
...........................................................................................................................................20
How to register
...........................................................................................................................................22
SQL Manager
License Agreement
...........................................................................................................................................23
Version history
...........................................................................................................................................25
Other EMS
...........................................................................................................................................45
Products
Part II Getting started 52

Selecting...........................................................................................................................................54
style and language
First time...........................................................................................................................................56
started
Using Desktop
...........................................................................................................................................58
Panel
Database...........................................................................................................................................60
navigation
Working with
...........................................................................................................................................62
database objects
Using context
...........................................................................................................................................64
menus
Host context
..................................................................................................................................................................
menu 64
Database..................................................................................................................................................................
context menu 65
Object context
..................................................................................................................................................................
menu 66
Switching...........................................................................................................................................68
windows
Part III Database Explorer 70

Managing...........................................................................................................................................73
database registration info
Connecting
...........................................................................................................................................75
to databases
Operations
...........................................................................................................................................77
with database objects
Selecting...........................................................................................................................................79
multiple objects
Using tabs
...........................................................................................................................................81
for database navigation
Recently ...........................................................................................................................................83
opened objects
Creating projects
...........................................................................................................................................84
Searching
...........................................................................................................................................87
within the tree
SQL Assistant
...........................................................................................................................................90
Configuring
...........................................................................................................................................92
Database Explorer
Managing...........................................................................................................................................94
Favorite queries

Part IV Database management 96

Register Host
...........................................................................................................................................99
wizard
Setting connection
..................................................................................................................................................................
parameters 100
SSH connection
..................................................................................................................................................................
settings 101
Setting specific
..................................................................................................................................................................
options 102
Create Database
...........................................................................................................................................105
wizard
Setting database
..................................................................................................................................................................
name 106
Setting connection
..................................................................................................................................................................
properties 106
Defining..................................................................................................................................................................
database files 108
Viewing..................................................................................................................................................................
result SQL statement 109
Register...........................................................................................................................................111
Database wizard
Setting connection
..................................................................................................................................................................
parameters 112
Registering
..................................................................................................................................................................
DB on a new host 113
Setting specific
..................................................................................................................................................................
options 114
Database
...........................................................................................................................................117
Registration Info
Editing connection
..................................................................................................................................................................
properties 118
Setting common
..................................................................................................................................................................
database options 119
Setting system
..................................................................................................................................................................
objects options 120
Setting grid
..................................................................................................................................................................
and data options 122
Defining..................................................................................................................................................................
Events 124
Setting default
..................................................................................................................................................................
directories 125
Setting log
..................................................................................................................................................................
options 126
Host Registration
...........................................................................................................................................128
Info
Connection
..................................................................................................................................................................
properties 128
Host options
.................................................................................................................................................................. 130
SSH tunneling
.................................................................................................................................................................. 131
Database
...........................................................................................................................................133
Properties
General .................................................................................................................................................................. 134
Active users
.................................................................................................................................................................. 135
Description
.................................................................................................................................................................. 135
Part V Database objects management 138

New Object
...........................................................................................................................................140
Duplicate
...........................................................................................................................................141
Object Wizard
Selecting ..................................................................................................................................................................
the source database 141
Selecting ..................................................................................................................................................................
object to duplicate 142
Selecting ..................................................................................................................................................................
destination database 142
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Specifying object details 143
Modifying ..................................................................................................................................................................
the new object's definition 144
Domains...........................................................................................................................................146
Domain ..................................................................................................................................................................
Editor 147
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Using navigation bar 148
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Editing domain definition 149
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Editing domain check 150
Tables ...........................................................................................................................................152
New Table .................................................................................................................................................................. 153
..........................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Setting table properties 155
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Specifying fields 156

Table Editor
.................................................................................................................................................................. 157
..........................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Managing fields 160
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Changing fields order 161
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Editing table constraints 162
Using navigation .........................................................................................................................................
bar 163
Managing primary .........................................................................................................................................
keys 164
Primary Key Editor ................................................................................................................................... 166
Editing primary key ...................................................................................................................................
definition 166
Managing foreign.........................................................................................................................................
keys 167
Foreign Key Editor ................................................................................................................................... 169
Editing foreign key ...................................................................................................................................
definition 170
Managing checks......................................................................................................................................... 171
Check Editor ................................................................................................................................... 173
Editing check definition ................................................................................................................................... 173
Managing unique.........................................................................................................................................
keys 174
Uniques Editor ................................................................................................................................... 176
Editing unique key ...................................................................................................................................
definition 177
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Managing indices 177
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Managing triggers 178
Fields .................................................................................................................................................................. 179
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Field Editor 181
Setting field name .........................................................................................................................................
and type 182
Setting field defaults ......................................................................................................................................... 183
Defining array ......................................................................................................................................... 184
Defining autoincrement ......................................................................................................................................... 185
Setting field checks ......................................................................................................................................... 189
Indices .................................................................................................................................................................. 190
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Index Editor 191
Editing index properties ......................................................................................................................................... 192
Editing index fields ......................................................................................................................................... 193
Creating..................................................................................................................................................................
table view 194
Views ...........................................................................................................................................196
View Editor.................................................................................................................................................................. 197
..........................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Editing view definition 199
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Viewing fields 200
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Managing triggers 201
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Viewing data 201
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Viewing query plan 202
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Viewing perfomance analysis 203
Triggers...........................................................................................................................................205
Trigger Editor
.................................................................................................................................................................. 206
..........................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Editing trigger definition 208
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Editing trigger messages 210
Procedures
...........................................................................................................................................211
Procedure ..................................................................................................................................................................
Editor 213
..........................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Editing procedure definition 216
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Browsing procedure parameters 216
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Executing procedure 218
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Viewing perfomance analysis 218

Procedure/Trgger
..................................................................................................................................................................
Debugger 219
UDFs ...........................................................................................................................................221
UDF Editor.................................................................................................................................................................. 222
..........................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Editing UDF definition 224
Exceptions
...........................................................................................................................................227
Exception ..................................................................................................................................................................
Editor 228
..........................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Editing exception definition 230
Generators
...........................................................................................................................................232
Generator ..................................................................................................................................................................
Editor 233
..........................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Editing generator definition 235
BLOB Filters
...........................................................................................................................................237
BLOB Filter
..................................................................................................................................................................
Editor 238
..........................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Editing BLOB Filter definition 240
Journals...........................................................................................................................................242
Creating..................................................................................................................................................................
journal 243
Journal ..................................................................................................................................................................
management 244
Database
...........................................................................................................................................248
Triggers
Database ..................................................................................................................................................................
Trigger Editor 249
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Using Navigation bar 249
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Editing DB Trigger definition 250
Part VI Query management tools 254

SQL Editor
...........................................................................................................................................256
Using Navigation
..................................................................................................................................................................
bar 256
Working..................................................................................................................................................................
with SQL Editor area 258
Using the
..................................................................................................................................................................
context menu 259
Viewing ..................................................................................................................................................................
query plan 261
Using object
..................................................................................................................................................................
links 262
Executing
..................................................................................................................................................................
queries 262
Viewing ..................................................................................................................................................................
query logs 263
Favorites
..................................................................................................................................................................
editor 264
Visual Query
...........................................................................................................................................267
Builder
Using Navigation
..................................................................................................................................................................
bar 267
Working..................................................................................................................................................................
with diagram area 268
Joining ..................................................................................................................................................................
two objects 270
Setting criteria
.................................................................................................................................................................. 271
Setting output
..................................................................................................................................................................
fields 273
Setting grouping
..................................................................................................................................................................
criteria 275
Setting sorting
..................................................................................................................................................................
parameters 276
Working..................................................................................................................................................................
with the editor area 277
Query execution
.................................................................................................................................................................. 279
Viewing ..................................................................................................................................................................
query plan 280
Query parameters
...........................................................................................................................................282
Input parameters
..................................................................................................................................................................
dialog 282
Part VII Data management 284

Data View
...........................................................................................................................................285
Grid View .................................................................................................................................................................. 285
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Grouping data 286
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Filtering records 288
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Using the context menu 291
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Working in multi-level mode 293
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Create Grid Level wizard 294
Specifying master.........................................................................................................................................
level 294
Defining source for .........................................................................................................................................
detail level 295
Binding master and .........................................................................................................................................
detail levels 296
Query parameterization ......................................................................................................................................... 297
Setting additional.........................................................................................................................................
parameters 298
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Working in card view mode 299
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Column Summary 301
Form View .................................................................................................................................................................. 301
Print Data .................................................................................................................................................................. 303
BLOB View .................................................................................................................................................................. 304
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Navigation within BLOB Editor 305
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Editing as Hexadecimal 306
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Editing as Text 308
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Editing as Rich Text 309
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Editing as Image 311
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Editing as HTML 311
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Applying changes 313
Custom ...........................................................................................................................................315
Filter
Filter Builder
...........................................................................................................................................316
dialog
Invoking..................................................................................................................................................................
the Filter Builder dialog 316
Adding a..................................................................................................................................................................
new condition 317
Setting filter
..................................................................................................................................................................
criteria 318
Setting filter
..................................................................................................................................................................
operator 319
Setting filter
..................................................................................................................................................................
criteria values 319
Adding a..................................................................................................................................................................
new group 320
Setting group
..................................................................................................................................................................
operator 321
Applying..................................................................................................................................................................
filter conditions 322
Part VIII Import/Export Tools 326

Export Data
...........................................................................................................................................327
Wizard
Setting destination
..................................................................................................................................................................
file name and format 327
Selecting ..................................................................................................................................................................
fields for export 328
Adjusting ..................................................................................................................................................................
data formats 329
Setting header
..................................................................................................................................................................
and footer 330
Setting format-specific
..................................................................................................................................................................
options 331
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Excel options 332
Data format ......................................................................................................................................... 332
Fields ................................................................................................................................... 333
Options ................................................................................................................................... 333
Styles ................................................................................................................................... 334
Extensions ......................................................................................................................................... 335
Hyperlinks ................................................................................................................................... 335
Notes ................................................................................................................................... 336
Charts ................................................................................................................................... 336
Cells ................................................................................................................................... 337

Merged Cells ................................................................................................................................... 338

Advanced ......................................................................................................................................... 338
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Access options 339
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Word / RTF options 340
Base Styles ......................................................................................................................................... 341
Strip Styles ......................................................................................................................................... 342
..........................................................................................................................................................................
HTML options 343
Preview ......................................................................................................................................... 343
Basic ......................................................................................................................................... 344
Multi-file ......................................................................................................................................... 345
Advanced ......................................................................................................................................... 345
..........................................................................................................................................................................
PDF options 346
..........................................................................................................................................................................
TXT options 347
..........................................................................................................................................................................
CSV options 348
..........................................................................................................................................................................
XML options 349
..........................................................................................................................................................................
MS Excel 2007 options 350
..........................................................................................................................................................................
MS Word 2007 options 352
..........................................................................................................................................................................
ODF options 355
Setting common
..................................................................................................................................................................
export options 357
Exporting ..................................................................................................................................................................
data 358
Import Data
...........................................................................................................................................360
Wizard
Selecting ..................................................................................................................................................................
source file name and format 360
Selecting ..................................................................................................................................................................
data source 361
Setting fields
..................................................................................................................................................................
correspondence 362
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Excel 363
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Access 363
..........................................................................................................................................................................
DBF 364
..........................................................................................................................................................................
XML Datapacket 365
..........................................................................................................................................................................
TXT 366
..........................................................................................................................................................................
CSV 367
..........................................................................................................................................................................
HTML 368
..........................................................................................................................................................................
XML Generic 369
..........................................................................................................................................................................
MS Excel/Word 2007, ODF 370
Adjusting ..................................................................................................................................................................
data formats 371
Setting advanced
..................................................................................................................................................................
field formats 372
Setting import
..................................................................................................................................................................
mode 374
Customizing..................................................................................................................................................................
common options 375
Importing ..................................................................................................................................................................
data 377
Export as
...........................................................................................................................................378
SQL Script
Defining..................................................................................................................................................................
the type of destination server 378
Setting destination
..................................................................................................................................................................
file name 379
Setting BLOB
..................................................................................................................................................................
options 380
Selecting
..................................................................................................................................................................
fields to export 381
Editing table
..................................................................................................................................................................
definition 382
Setting export
..................................................................................................................................................................
options 383
Exporting
..................................................................................................................................................................
as SQL Script 384
Part IX Database tools 388

Common
...........................................................................................................................................389
DB Tools
Dependency ..................................................................................................................................................................
Tree 389
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Visual Database
..................................................................................................................................................................
Designer 392
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Using Navigation bar and context menu 393

..........................................................................................................................................................................
Diagram Navigator 395
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Adding objects to diagram 396
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Removing objects from diagram 397
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Creating new table 398
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Creating relationships 399
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Working with multiple pages 400
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Reverse engineering 400
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Printing diagram 401
Print Preview dialog ......................................................................................................................................... 402
Print Setup dialog......................................................................................................................................... 403
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Saving/Loading diagram 404
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Setting diagram options 405
SQL Script ..................................................................................................................................................................
Editor 406
..........................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Using the context menu 407
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Using Script Explorer 409
Extract Database
..................................................................................................................................................................
Wizard 409
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Selecting source database 410
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Specifying destination file name 411
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Setting extraction mode 412
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Setting BLOB options 413
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Selecting objects for structure extraction 414
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Selecting objects for data extraction 415
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Customizing script options 416
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Start of extraction process 418
Print Metadata
.................................................................................................................................................................. 419
..........................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Printing options 420
HTML Report..................................................................................................................................................................
Wizard 422
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Selecting database and directory 422
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Selecting object types 423
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Specifying CSS 424
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Setting additional report options 425
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Creating HTML report 426
Reports ..................................................................................................................................................................
management 427
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Create Report Wizard 428
Specifying database .........................................................................................................................................
name and report options 428
Selecting report bands ......................................................................................................................................... 429
Selecting report style ......................................................................................................................................... 431
Specifying paper.........................................................................................................................................
settings 431
Specifying margins ......................................................................................................................................... 432
Specifying other page .........................................................................................................................................
settings 433
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Report Designer 434
Adding dialog form ......................................................................................................................................... 435
Adding database.........................................................................................................................................
and query components 437
Adding report data ......................................................................................................................................... 438
Viewing the report ......................................................................................................................................... 440
Saving the report......................................................................................................................................... 441
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Report Viewer 442
Using Navigation.........................................................................................................................................
bar 443
SQL Monitor.................................................................................................................................................................. 443
..........................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Working with SQL Monitor 444
Specific...........................................................................................................................................446
DB Tools

Backup ..................................................................................................................................................................
database 446
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Selecting database to backup 447
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Setting backup options 449
Restore ..................................................................................................................................................................
database 451
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Selecting destination database 452
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Restore from incremental backup 453
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Restoring DB on a new host 454
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Setting restore options 456
Database ..................................................................................................................................................................
validation 457
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Selecting database for validation 458
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Validation options 459
Database ..................................................................................................................................................................
statistics 460
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Selecting database for statistics 461
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Database statistics options 462
Start/Stop ..................................................................................................................................................................
database 463
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Shutdown database options 464
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Bring database online 465
Rebuild ..................................................................................................................................................................
indices 466
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Selecting database for indices management 467
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Selecting the action for indices 468
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Selecting indices 469
Server Tools
...........................................................................................................................................471
Users .................................................................................................................................................................. 471
..........................................................................................................................................................................
User Manager 472
bar 473
Editing user info ......................................................................................................................................... 474
Roles .................................................................................................................................................................. 475
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Role Manager 475
bar 476
Defining role members ......................................................................................................................................... 477
Grant Manager
.................................................................................................................................................................. 478
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Using Navigation bar and context menu 478
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Managing database-specific privileges 480
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Managing column permissions 482
Server Messages
..................................................................................................................................................................
Editor 482
..........................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Editing IB Messages 483
Table Altering
..................................................................................................................................................................
Monitor 484
Search in ..................................................................................................................................................................
Metadata 484
Event Monitor
.................................................................................................................................................................. 486
Database ..................................................................................................................................................................
Monitor 487
Plugins ..................................................................................................................................................................
options 488
Part X Personalization 492

SQL Manager
...........................................................................................................................................493
Options
Environment
..................................................................................................................................................................
Options 493
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Preferences 494
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Full mode activation 495
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Confirmations 496
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Windows 498
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Tools 499
DB Explorer ......................................................................................................................................... 501
SQL Assistant ................................................................................................................................... 502

Object Editors ......................................................................................................................................... 503

Table Editor ................................................................................................................................... 504
Procedure Editor ................................................................................................................................... 505
SQL Editor ......................................................................................................................................... 506
SQL Monitor ......................................................................................................................................... 507
SQL Script ......................................................................................................................................... 508
Query Builder ......................................................................................................................................... 509
Style & Color Palette ................................................................................................................................... 511
Visual Database .........................................................................................................................................
Designer 512
Color Palette ................................................................................................................................... 514
Extract Database......................................................................................................................................... 516
Print Metadata ......................................................................................................................................... 516
Data Export ......................................................................................................................................... 517
Database Monitor......................................................................................................................................... 518
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Dependencies 519
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Transactions 520
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Fonts 521
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Grid 523
Data Options ......................................................................................................................................... 525
Print Data ......................................................................................................................................... 528
Color & Formats ......................................................................................................................................... 528
Advanced ......................................................................................................................................... 530
Column Options ......................................................................................................................................... 532
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Localization 534
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Find Option 535
Editor Options
.................................................................................................................................................................. 537
..........................................................................................................................................................................
General 537
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Display 541
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Color 543
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Quick Code 544
..........................................................................................................................................................................
SQL Formatter 546
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Key Mapping 548
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Spell Checking 550
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Find Option 551
Visual Options
.................................................................................................................................................................. 552
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Bars and menus 553
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Trees and lists 554
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Edit controls 555
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Check boxes 556
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Buttons 557
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Page controls 558
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Group boxes 559
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Splitters 560
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Navigation bar 561
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Find Option 562
Save Settings
.................................................................................................................................................................. 564
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Specifying destination file 564
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Selecting settings 565
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Selecting databases 566
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Saving settings 567
Localization
...........................................................................................................................................568
Localization
..................................................................................................................................................................
Editor 568
Select Program
..................................................................................................................................................................
Language 569

Keyboard
...........................................................................................................................................571
Templates
Find Option
...........................................................................................................................................573
dialog
Part XI External tools 576

External...........................................................................................................................................577
Tools dialog
External...........................................................................................................................................579
Tool Info editor
Part XII Appendix 582

Viewing...........................................................................................................................................582
object DDL structure
Editing object
...........................................................................................................................................583
description
Browsing
...........................................................................................................................................584
object dependencies
Setting object
...........................................................................................................................................585
permissions
Viewing...........................................................................................................................................586
object operations
Changing
...........................................................................................................................................587
Metadata window
Tip of the
...........................................................................................................................................589
Day
Find Text
...........................................................................................................................................590
dialog
Replace...........................................................................................................................................592
Text dialog
Format specifiers
...........................................................................................................................................594
Language
...........................................................................................................................................597
Info Editor
Using templates
...........................................................................................................................................598
Supported
...........................................................................................................................................599
file formats
To-Do List
...........................................................................................................................................601
Starting...........................................................................................................................................603
process/Viewing results
Quick save/Quick
...........................................................................................................................................604
load
Connection
...........................................................................................................................................605
Lost window
Customize
...........................................................................................................................................606
Toolbars

Part
I
1 Welcome to SQL Manager for IB/FB!

EMS SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird is a powerful tool for
InterBase/Firebird administration and development. It provides an easy-to-use graphical
interface for maintaining databases and database objects, managing table data, building
SQL queries, administering users and their privileges, extracting, printing, and searching
metadata, etc. SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird has a lot of unique features,
such as: SP Debugger, Visual Query Builder, Export Data to 15 available formats and
Import Data from most popular formats, BLOB Viewer/Editor, SQL Script processor and
many more… SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird has a new state-of-the-art
graphical user interface with well-described wizard system, so clear in use that even a
newbie will not be confused with it.
Visit our web-site for details: http://www.sqlmanager.net/
EMS SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird
· Compatibility of Firebird server versions up to 2.1 and of InterBase server versions up

to 2007
· Unicode support
· Powerful and easy-to-use graphical user interface
· Rapid database management and navigation
· Easy management of all InterBase and Firebird objects with Unicode support editors
· Effective security management
· Excellent visual and text tools for query building
· Report designer with clear in use report construction wizard
· Impressive data export and import wizards working in background mode
· Powerful visual database designer
· Easy-to-use wizards performing InterBase and Firebird services in background mode
· Other useful tools to make your work with InterBase and Firebird as easy as it can be
Product information:
Homepage: http://www.sqlmanager.net/en/products/ibfb/manager
Support Ticket System: http://www.sqlmanager.net/support
Register on-line at: http://www.sqlmanager.net/en/products/ibfb/manager/buy

1.1 What's new

SQL Manager for InterBase/Firebird 5. 0. 0. 1 - January 25, 2008
What's new in SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird?
1. Full InterBase 2007 and Firebird 2.1 support, including DB triggers, journaling and
incremental backup.
2. Support of UTF8 data in SQL Editor, Query Builder, Grid View, Data Export/Data
Import wizards.
3. Now you can continue working with SQL Manager while a query is being executed in
SQL Editor or Query Builder or while table or view data are being loaded to the editor.
A query taking too long to execute can be aborted.
4. All Wizards, including Data Export/Data Import, DB Extract and Services wizard can
now be run in the background mode, so that you could continue working with the
program.
5. New improved SQL Editor of the Visual Studio 2005 kind with Code Folding function
and UNICODE support.
6. Improved Data Import Wizard now allows importing data up to 10 times faster. New
import formats have been added: HTML, XML Document, Open Document Format
(OpenOffice), Open XML Format (MS Word 2007, MS Excel 2007).
7. Improved Data Export Wizard now works faster. New export formats have been
added: XML Document, Open Document Format (OpenOffice), Open XML Format (MS
Word 2007, MS Excel 2007)
8. Improved Extract DB Wizard works faster; now it also considers all object
dependencies and allows defining the server version to generate the script for.
9. Common SQL commands can now be generated from DB Explorer (Script to SQL
Editor, Script to Clipboard). Now you can easily generate such SQL commands as
CREATE, ALTER, DROP, SELECT etc. for each database object.
10. Now you can save your queries in the Favourite Queries folders in DB Explorer; these
queries сan be stored either locally in the registry (nobody but you will have access to
them) or in a special database table (then all or some of your db users will have
access to it).
11. Improved Visual database designer, new objects like comments and virtual
relationship added. Now it is possible to include Procedures, Functions and Views in
the diagram. One can choose whether only object names or also fields and
parameters should be displayed.
12. Dependency tree tool can now be run in the background mode, so that you could
continue working with the program.
13. Viewing database statistics ability extended. Now you can analyze temporary system

tables (must be supported by server).
14. Grid View improved. Now the data of a sublevel of the Master or Detail table linked
with the current table by a foreign key can be displayed automatically.
15. The ability to switch between the visual and non-visual modes in trigger, view and
procedure editor is implemented.
16. External plugin interface is restored.
17. Firebird database alias file support implemented.
18. Improved Procedure debugger with the Call Stack feature implemented. Now you can
navigate your embedded calls of stored procedures easily.
19. Improved Table Editor. Now like in other object editors the scripts that are connected
with the changes made at the Editor window are accumulated and can then be
executed at a time during compilation. A user can also select the scripts to be
executed.
20. The options added that allow the relevant services stop, start and open a database
automatically.
21. The Find option function is added to SQL Manager settings form as well as to the
database and host registration info forms.
22. The Recompute All service has been added which allows rebuild all database indices
(or just selected ones) or recalculate their statistics.
23. The search for an object in DB Explorer is enhanced. Now you can perform
incremental search by names as well as define the search area.
24. For users’ convenience the Windows List function is implemented as a separate DB
Explorer tab with the search ability.
25. In DB Explorer hosts are now named in accordance with the selected connection type
(SSH tunneling or direct connection).
26. SQL Script. Ability to execute selected statements and statements under cursor
added.
27. Improved report building system.
28. Lots of other improvements and bug-fixes.

1.2 System requirements
System requirements for SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird
· 300-megahertz (MHz) Intel® Pentium II-compatible or faster processor;

600-megahertz (MHz) or faster processor recommended
· Microsoft® Windows NT4 with SP4 or later, Microsoft® Windows 2000, Microsoft®
Windows 2000 Server, Microsoft® Windows XP, Microsoft® Windows 2003 Server,
Microsoft® Windows Vista
· 64MB RAM or more; 128MB or more recommended
· 50MB of available HD space for program installation
· Super VGA (800x600) or higher-resolution video adapter and monitor; Super VGA
(1024x768) or higher-resolution video adapter and monitor recommended
· Microsoft® Mouse or compatible pointing device
· InterBase/Firebird client
· Possibility to connect to any local or remote InterBase/Firebird

1.3 Feature Matrix

The FREE Lite version of SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird does not include
all features of the Full version and has some limitations concerning the number of the
databases that can be registered and a number of data manipulation and server
maintenance tools. The detailed feature matrix is given below.
Note that when using the FREE Lite version of SQL Manager 2008 for
InterBase/Firebird you can activate a 30-day period of fully-functional usage. After the
period expires, you will be able to continue using the Lite version.
For more information on activating the Full version features see Full Mode activation.

1.4 Installation
If you are installing SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird for the first time on
your PC:
· download the SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird distribution package from
the download page available at our site;
· unzip the downloaded file to any local directory, e.g. C:\unzipped;
· run IbManagerFull.exe from the local directory and follow the instructions of the
installation wizard;
· after the installation process is completed, find the SQL Manager shortcut in the
corresponding group of Windows Start menu.
If you want to upgrade an installed copy of SQL Manager 2008 for

InterBase/Firebird to the latest version:
· download the executable file of SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird from the
download page available at our site;
· unzip the downloaded file to any local directory, e.g. C:\unzipped;
· close SQL Manager application if it is running;
· replace the previous version of SQL Manager by copying the unzipped executable file
to the C:\...\%program_directory%\ location;
· run SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird using its shortcut in the corresponding
group of Windows Start menu.
Also you can use the full distribution package to upgrade your current version of SQL
Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird. In this case, you should repeat the steps you have
made for the first-time installation. Note that the full distribution package is larger than a
single executable file.
See also:
License agreement

1.5 Registration
To make it easier for you to purchase our products, we have contracted with share-it!
registration service. The share-it! order process is protected via a secure connection and
makes on-line ordering by credit/debit card quick and safe. The following information
about share-it! is provided for your convenience.
Share-it! is a global e-commerce provider for software and shareware sales via the
Internet. Share-it! accepts payments in US Dollars, Euros, Pounds Sterling, Japanese
Yen, Australian Dollars, Canadian Dollars or Swiss Franks by Credit Card (Visa,
MasterCard/EuroCard, American Express, Diners Club), Bank/Wire Transfer, Check or
Cash.
If you have ordered EMS software online and would like to review your order information,
or if you have questions about ordering, payments, or shipping procedures, please visit
our Customer Care Center, provided by share-it!
Please note that all of our products are delivered via ESD (Electronic Software Delivery)
only. After purchase you will be able to immediately download the registration keys or
passwords and download links for archives of full versions. Also you will receive a copy of
registration keys or passwords by e-mail. Please make sure to enter a valid e-mail
address in your order. If you have not received the keys within 2 hours, please, contact
us at [email protected].
Product distribution Price

SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird (Business license) + $275
1-Year Maintenance*
2-Year Maintenance*
3-Year Maintenance* Register
SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird (Non-commercial $135 Now!
license) + 1-Year Maintenance*
SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird (Non-commercial $169
SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird (Non-commercial $189
SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird (Trial version) Free! Download
Now!
SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird Lite Free! Download
Now!
*EMS Maintenance Program provides the following benefits:

· Free software bug fixes, enhancements, updates and upgrades during the
maintenance period
· Free unlimited communications with technical staff for the purpose of reporting
Software failures
· Free reasonable number of communications for the purpose of consultation on
operational aspects of the software

After your maintenance expires you will not be able to update your software or get
technical support. To protect your investments and have your software up-to-date, you
need to renew your maintenance.
You can easily reinitiate/renew your maintenance with our on-line, speed-through
Maintenance Reinstatement/Renewal Interface. After reinitiating/renewal you will receive
a confirmation e-mail with all the necessary information.
See also:
How to register SQL Manager

1.6 How to register SQL Manager

If you have not registered your copy of SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird yet, you
can do it by pressing the Register Now button and entering your registration
information in the Register SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird dialog.
To register your newly purchased copy of EMS SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird,
perform the following steps:
· receive the notification letter from Share-it! with the registration info;
· enter the Registration Name and the Registration Key from this letter;
· make sure that the registration process has been completed successfully – check the
registration information in the About SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird
dialog (use the Help | About menu item to open this dialog).
See also:
Registration
License Agreement

1.7 License Agreement

Copyright (C) 1999-2008 EMS Database Management Solutions, Inc.
All rights reserved.
IMPORTANT: PLEASE READ THIS AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE

SOFTWARE.
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

EMS Database Management Solutions, Inc. ("EMS") agrees to provide the user ("USER")
with a copy of this software product ("SOFTWARE"), and grants the USER a limited
license to use the SOFTWARE. This LICENSE AGREEMENT ("LICENSE") defines what the
USER may do with the SOFTWARE, and contains limitations on warranties, liabilities and
remedies. This LICENSE may be revoked by EMS at any time without notice if the USER
fails to comply with the terms of this LICENSE. The copyright and all other rights in the
SOFTWARE shall remain with EMS.
LICENSE OF UNREGISTERED SOFTWARE

An unregistered copy of the SOFTWARE ("UNREGISTERED SOFTWARE") may be used by
the USER for evaluation purposes for a period of thirty (30) days following the initial
installation of the UNREGISTERED SOFTWARE. At the end of the trial period ("TRIAL
PERIOD"), the USER must either register the SOFTWARE or remove it from his system.
The UNREGISTERED SOFTWARE may be freely copied and distributed to other users for
their evaluation.
LICENSE OF REGISTERED SOFTWARE

A registered copy of the SOFTWARE ("REGISTERED SOFTWARE") allows the USER to use
the SOFTWARE only on a single computer or network and only by a single user at a time.
If the USER wishes to use the SOFTWARE for more than one user, the USER will need a
separate license for each individual user. The USER is allowed to make one copy of the
REGISTERED SOFTWARE for back-up purposes.
DISTRIBUTION OF UNREGISTERED SOFTWARE

The uninstalled, UNREGISTERED SOFTWARE may be freely copied and distributed to
other users provided the USER complies with the following requirements. If the USER
offers this uninstalled, UNREGISTERED SOFTWARE for download ("SHAREWARE SITE
USER"), then the SHAREWARE SITE USER agrees to:
(1) Immediately replace this version of the uninstalled, UNREGISTERED SOFTWARE with
a new version of this SOFTWARE if a new version is released by EMS, or
(2) Delete this version of the UNREGISTERED SOFTWARE immediately upon written email
notice by EMS.
TERM OF LICENSE
This LICENSE shall continue for as long as the USER uses the REGISTERED SOFTWARE
and/or distributes the UNREGISTERED SOFTWARE according to the terms of this
agreement.
However, this LICENSE will terminate if the USER fails to comply with any of its terms or
conditions. The USER agrees, upon termination, to destroy all copies of the REGISTERED
and/or UNREGISTERED SOFTWARE. The limitations of warranties and liability set forth in
this LICENSE shall continue in force even after termination.
ACCEPTANCE OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT

By downloading and/or installing this SOFTWARE, the USER agrees to the terms of this

LICENSE.
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY AND LIABILITY
THE SOFTWARE AND THE ACCOMPANYING FILES ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW,
EMS DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NONINFRINGEMENT. TO THE MAXIMUM
EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL EMS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR
LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE
THE SOFTWARE.
ANY LIABILITY OF EMS WILL BE LIMITED EXCLUSIVELY TO PRODUCT REPLACEMENT OR

REFUND OF ORIGINAL PURCHASE PRICE.
OTHER RESTRICTIONS
The USER may not rent, lease, sublicense, translate, disassemble, reverse engineer, or
de-compile the SOFTWARE, or modify or merge the SOFTWARE with any part of the
software in another program. This LICENSE may not be assigned or otherwise transferred
without the prior written consent of EMS.
INVALID PROVISIONS
If any provision of this LICENSE shall be declared invalid or unenforceable, the remaining
provisions of this LICENSE shall remain in full force and effect to the fullest extent
permitted by law. In such event, each provision of this LICENSE which is invalid or
unenforceable shall be replaced with a provision as similar in terms to such invalid or
unenforceable provision as may be possible which is legal and enforceable.
ENTIRE AGREEMENT
This LICENSE is the entire agreement between EMS and the USER, and supersedes any
other agreement, oral or written, and may not be changed except by a written signed
agreement.

1.8 Version history

Version Date Released
Version 4.4.0.1 November 22, 2006
Version 4.3.0.1 May 31, 2006
Version 4.2.0.1 April 4, 2006
Version 4.1.0.1 February 20, 2006
Version 4.0.0.1 January 27, 2006
Version 3.9.5.1 September 8, 2005
Version 3.8.5.1 December 7, 2004
Version 3.8.0.1 August 23, 2004
Version 3.7.0.1 January 19, 2004
Version 3.6.5.1 September 5, 2003
Version 3.6.0.1 July 9, 2003
Version 3.5.0.1 May 27, 2003
Version 3.4.0.1 April 21, 2003
Version 3.3.0.1 March 12, 2003
Version 3.2 January 21, 2003
Version 3.1 January 06, 2003
Version 3.0 December 16, 2002
Full version history is available at http://sqlmanager.net/en/products/ibfb/manager/news

.
Version 4.4 - November 22, 2006
1. Register Database Wizard

· The option that allows to skip refreshing objects on connection to database is
added. It is highly recommended to uncheck this option if your database contains
many objects or if connection to the database is slow.
· Import of database registration information from the previous version settings of
SQL Manager for IB/FB is improved. Local databases are now registered according
to the servers which use similar client libraries for connection.
· Embedded database registration has become simpler.
· 'Copy Alias From' option is added in the new database registration dialog.
· It was impossible to register a database when there were no hosts registered.
Fixed now.
2. InterBase 2007 partial support implemented. Now the UTF-8, UNICODE_BE,

UNICODE_LE charsets are supported.
3. SSH Tunneling
· The ability to use one SSH tunnel to establish connection for several
hosts/databases at the same time is added.
· Now it's possible to use tunneling for the services.
4. Field Editor

· New Field editor form.

· Now it's possible to fill the NOT NULL fields which have no DEFAULT value set with
the data taken from the fields of the table being edited.
5. Grid
· The ability to display and edit ARRAY fields is added.
· When editing data or deleting records in a table which contains no unique or
primary key, errors often occurred (the changes were not applied). Fixed now.
· It was impossible to edit a BLOB type field in Detail Level. Fixed now.
6. SQL Reference is available again now. It can be called from object editors.
7. Extract Database Wizard

· The ARRAY type data can be saved to an external file now.
· An option is added which allows to extract metadata of the objects on which the
current object depends.
· The object dependency handling is improved.
8. Restore Database Interface improved. Now it's possible to register the server on
which the backup copy will be restored.
9. Export as SQL Script. The ARRAY type data can be saved to an external file now.
10. Duplicate Object Wizard. Now when duplicating table data the BLOB and ARRAY type
fields can be duplicated.
11. SQL Script

· A script can now be executed from cursor; execution of the selected fragment is
also possible.
· String comments (beginning with '--') are recognized correctly now.
· The ARRAY type data can now be imported from an external file when executing
SET BLOBFILE statement.
12. Stored Procedures Debugger

· When performing input for the DECIMAL and NUMERIC type parameters the
decimal delimiter used to change with the localization applied. Fixed now.
· The value of the empty string was treated as NULL. Fixed now.
· The FIRST statement is recognized correctly now.
13. UDF Editor/BLOB Filter Editor. Now there's no need to take an object's dependencies
into account when changing its parameters.
14. Procedure Editor. The support of BLOB type parameters for Firebird is implemented.
15. Code Completion. The Code Completion feature is implemented for table aliases.
16. Dependencies/Dependency Tree. When analyzing dependencies the objects referred

to in CHECK constraint bodies and COMPUTED BY table fields are now taken into
account.
17. Other small improvements and bugfixes.

Version 4.3 - May 31, 2006
1. Export as SQL Script.

· Now you can specify DBMS server for which the script should be generated.
· Now it's possible to export BLOB field content into an external file with the ability
to compress data. When executing the result script the data from the external file
will be placed into the corresponding fields.
2. Extract Database Wizard.

· To avoid errors during script execution the 'computed by' fields are moved to the
end of table fields list; then their position is restored.
· Now it's possible to export BLOB field content into an external file with the ability
to compress data. When executing the result script the data from the external file
will be placed into the corresponding fields.
3. DB Explorer. The Add to Projects command is added. Now objects can be added by
specifying them in the corresponding dialog, as well as by dragging into Projects
folder.
4. Dependency Tree. The ability to view dependencies for the domains that refer to
other objects via Check constraints is added, as well as dependencies for the tables
that refer to other objects via Check constraints and those for the tables that use
UDFs in their 'computed by' fields.
5. Grid.
· The 'Expand All' and 'Collapse All' context menu items added.
· The 'Save column sorting' option is added for the 'Save and restore layout' mode
6. CPU usage significantly decreased.
7. SQL Editor.
· For the queries which allow data insert the ability to import data into the table
implemented.
· The Ctrl+Shift+Enter shortcut for pointing out the corresponding item in DB
Explorer tree worked incorrectly. Fixed now.
· Now it's possible to rename and move query tabs
· Query execution time is now displayed in hh:mm:ss format
· 'Select All' command didn't work correctly on text that had very long lines (more
than 4096 symbols). Fixed now.
8. Controls at the toolbars now remain after installing a newer version of the product.
To bring them to their default state you can use corresponding command from
Windows menu or corresponding button in Environment Options dialog.
9. Data Import wizard. When setting column correspondence for import from Excel,
selecting a new column caused cursor to move to the first column in grid. Fixed now.
10. Database Registration Info. When applying changes, the originality of database
aliases used not to be checked. Fixed now.
11. Visual Database Designer. Switching to another visual scheme didn't take any effect
on context menu style. Fixed now.

12. Localization
· Russian localization added.
· Corrections and improvements in German and English localizations.
13. Shutdown Database and Bring Database Online services are combined together and
placed into Start/Stop Database wizard which allows using templates.
14. Domain Editor. The Collation was not displayed when opening Domain Editor. Fixed
now.
15. SQL Script.

· Executing DROP DATABASE statement with database name, login and password
without having connected to it first.
· Now after dropping a database the Unregister Database dialog appears.
· Handling the AutoDDL mode without SET AUTODDL statement executition.
· When DROP DATABASE and CONNECT statementes are executed without login
and password the Login dialog appears.
16. Many other small improvements and bugfixes.
Version 4.2 - April 4, 2006
1. German localization added.
2. Editor Options. Key Mapping is implemented to set the shortcuts for various
commands/operations according to your needs.
3. Visual Query Builder. Query execution plan is now displayed as a graphical diagram.
4. Dependency Tree. The diagram can now be printed.
5. Ability to call Register Database Wizard from SQL Script for the databases created is
implemented.
6. SQL editors
· Next Bookmark, Previous Bookmark context menu items added.
· In some rare cases, an attempt to use Code Complete tool with 'Trim trailing
spaces' option on, cleared all the line with 'Trim trailing spaces' option on. Fixed
now.
· Dragging the field names from SQL Assistant works perfectly now.
7. SQL Editor. Abillity to execute statement under cursor added.
8. Visual Database Designer. The Drop Table context menu item worked incorrectly if the
field, not the table itself, was selected. Fixed now.
9. Import Data Wizard.

· Now with the 'Commit changes manually' option switched on at the end of import
you will be prompted for an action with transaction.

· Ability to resize wizard's window added.

· On setting format for fields to import, the 'Generator Value' and 'Constant Value'
options used to be ignored. Fixed now.
· Having specified user-defined fields to import, the rest of them were filled with
empty strings; so that default values defined for the fields were not applied. Fixed
now.
10. HTML Report. Ability to change header/footer of the report added.
11. SQL Script. Abort executing script confirmation added.
12. DB Explorer. The context menu didn't hide when switching to another application.
Fixed now.
13. Table Editor. The lines exceeding 32 symbols were truncated when exporting lists of
subobjects. Fixed now.
14. Procedure Editor and Trigger Editor. Parameters or variables deleted in editor window
used to reappear in trigger/procedure body after compilation. Fixed now.
15. On attempt to execute a query or procedure with Date, Timestamp, Time typed
parameters, the Conversion Error message appeared. Fixed now.
16. There were no checks for the type of file when creating a report by import from file,
which initiated errors. Fixed now.
17. When creating a report its components working with data used only default client
library, so that in some rare cases it was impossible to open reports working with the
database on a local host. Fixed now.
18. Most memory leaks fixed.
19. SQL Script. The ability to re-execute the script which finished with errors added.
20. When editing the data containing fields with NULL values, changed data used to
restore their previous values after commit. Fixed now.
21. Other small improvements and bug fixes.
Version 4.1 - February 20, 2006
1. DB Explorer. Faster connection and refresh speed.
2. The ability to register multiple local servers is added.
3. Table Editor. Errors used to occur when displaying data from the tables containing
many records. Fixed now.
4. Dependency Tree. Search method for finding dependant objects is improved.
5. SQL Editor. Code Insight. Fields of tables and views as well as keywords are now

displayed in the drop down list.
6. Create database. Wrong script for creating database used to be generated. Fixed
now.
7. Domain Editor. The ability to set Charset and Collation restored.
8. Field Editor. The ability to set Charset and Collation restored.
9. Input Parameters. When opening 'Parameters' dialog on executing the queries in SQL
Editor and Visual Query Builder an error occured. Fixed now.
10. Grid. Form View. Memo fields editor is extended (can be customized in Grid >
Advanced tab of Environment Options dialog).
11. SQL Script. Multiple windows can be opened now.
12. Visual Database Designer. There were no changes seen in opened graphical diagram
when the table name or any table field was edited. Fixed now.
13. The 'Keyword "DB_KEY" already in list' error message used to appear when
connecting to FB 2.0 server. Fixed.
14. View Editor. The ability to process the views containing FIRST as keyword in the
queries added now.
15. View Editor. The ability to process the views containing CAST as keyword in the
queries added now.
16. Database Validation. Validation Wizard used to ignore the changes made on the first
step, which caused an attempt to connect to current database and subsequent error.
Fixed now.
17. Procedure Editor. The ability to use simultaneous names for variables in different
procedures restored.
18. DB Explorer. After dropping a table its triggers were still displayed in the DB Explorer
tree. Fixed.
19. Field Editor. Autoincrement. On renaming the generator its name used to stay
unchanged in trigger's and procedure's body. Fixed now.
20. Other small improvements and bugfixes.
Version 4.0 - January 27, 2006
1. Latest InterBase and Firebird versions support

· Compatible with any Firebird server version up to 2.0
· Compatible with any InterBase server version up to 7.5
· Trigger messages support
· Support of BLOB Filters

2. Significantly improved user interface

· Office 11 and Windows XP visual schemes support
· New well-described Wizard System
· New useful Navigation Bars in most of the windows
· New Windows Toolbar to switch between windows easily, like in Windows Task Bar
3. Improved Database Explorer

· Creating tabs for any tree node to access it in one-click!
· Work with multiple selected objects at a time
· Much more convenient toolbar and context menu
4. Completely remade Visual Database Designer

· Obvious new look
· Two diagram notations (IDEF1x and IE)
· Improved diagram navigation
· Several pages in one diagram to divide diagram into different subject areas
· A lot of visual customization options
5. New powerful data management tools

· Plenty of useful tools such as data grouping, summarizing, fast searching and filtering
· Master-Detail View to work with two linked tables at the same time
· Table and Card Views to see data the way you like
· Ability to copy and paste selected records
· Advanced printing system
· Fully customizable interface
6. New and improved database object editors

· New procedure and trigger editors with enhanced precompiler
· New view editor with automatic generation of view header and ability to create view
using visual query builder
· Quick saving and loading in all database object editors
· Autosaving database object with opportunity to restore on further connection
7. New opportunities to work with SQL queries

· Possibility of creating queries with unions and subqueries visually
· Ability to view query plans in the form of a diagram
8. New connection options

· SSH connections support to encrypt client/server communications for increased
security (Most suitable in case of Internet connection)
9. Improved report management

· New Create Report Wizard allows you to create simple report in a few clicks
Managing reports in the same way as if they were a database object: accessing reports
directly through DB Explorer tree
Version 3.9.5.1 - September 8, 2005
1. BLOB Editor. Added horisontal and vertical scrollers in the text view.

2. Added more national character sets in the database creation window and the
database properties form.
3. Improved localization files.
4. Added ability to fill newly created NOT NULL field with values of another field.
5. Added ability to display priviledges granted to the object at the DDL tab.
6. Now database error messages appear to be more informative. Now database error
numbers is displayed in addition to the message texts.
7. Stored Procedures Debugger. Fixed error when working with data of TIME datatype.
8. Visual Database Designer. It was impossible to save large database diagram as image
(jpg, bmp, gif ...). Fixed now.
9. Search in Metadata. While searching in large or remote databases the manager hung
up. Fixed now.
10. When loosing connection to the database it remained opened in the program. Fixed
now.
11. Fixed error with displaying views, created with CHECK OPTION.
12. Fixed error when changing database in the Script Editor.
13. Fixed error when creating index with the name in lowercase for dialect 1 database.
Version 3.9.0.2 - February 17, 2005
1. If a database had charset UNICODE_FSS or NONE, then the strings in local character
sets didn't display correctly in editor Data tabs. Now in Database Registration Info
you can manually disable encoding of Unicode strings to UTF8 to display data
correctly.
2. Fixed the bug with incorrect processing of IF ... ELSE statements in Stored Procedure
Debugger.
3. Stored Procedure Debugger. Pre-compilation parser now supports ROW_COUNT,

INSERTING, DELETING, UPDATING expressions.
4. The bugs with separate client libraries for each database are fixed now.
1. InterBase 7.5 full support.
2. FireBird 1.5 full support.
3. SQL Editor. Renewed smart Code Insight and Highlight in the editors - now the list of

all keywords is set depending on the current database server version.
4. Database Registration Info. An ability to choose a separate client library for each
registered database was added.
5. "Can't found Database login dialog.." bug is fixed now.
6. DDL tab: Fixed the problem with opening the tab.
7. It was impossible to create a domain of BIGINT type. Now the bug is fixed.
8. It was impossible to create an AutoIncrement field of BIGINT type. The problem is

solved.
9. Fixed the bug with 10000 length limit for CHAR and VARCHAR fields.
10. The bug with changing the field type from CHAR or VARCHAR to any numerical type is
fixed now.
11. COLLATION for the text fields couldn't be created. Now it is fixed.
12. The ability to set CHARSET property for the BLOB types which don't support it is
disabled now.
13. SQL Editor. The Result page didn't open after running a query which contained a
comment in the first line, beginning with "--". The problem is solved.
14. Extract Metadata. The COLLATION property for the domains is shown correctly now.
15. Script Comparer. The column index value is counted correctly now in the scripts like
"ALTER COLUMN POSITION ...".
16. The current database was disconnected by timeout without possibility to re-connect
when Database Properties window was opened. The bug is fixed.
17. Completely remade Restore Database service.
18. Stored Procedure Debugger. Solved the problem with not returning the output
procedure parameter when running "EXECUTE PROCEDURE ... RETURNING_VALUES
..."
19. Stored Procedure Debugger. Pressing the Reset button doesn't cause erasing
breakpoints now.
20. Stored Procedure Debugger. Incorrect results were shown in case of existence "FOR
SELECT ..." clause. Fixed now.
21. Stored Procedure Editor. The output procedure parameter wasn't returned if the
procedure was run without SUSPEND. Now it is solved.
22. View editor. It was impossible to edit simple views. Fixed now.
23. Window size and position were set incorrectly by default in SDI mode on multimonitor

systems. Now the bug is fixed.
24. Export Data. An exception arose when trying to export data to CSV. Fixed now.
25. Other small improvements.
Version 3.8.5.1 - December 7, 2004
1. Script Editor. We have added the possibility of executing the construction 'CREATE OR
ALTER'.
2. Eliminated the error with changing the field type from INTEGER to BIGINT when
working with FireBird server.
3. Extract Metadata. Disabled generation of SQL statements for indices that correspond
to the constraints.
4. Extract Metadata. The error with limiting precision to 5 in NUMERIC field types is
eliminated.
5. Extract Metadata. We have added the showing CHARACTER SET property for input and
output parameters of the stored procedures.
6. Extract Metadata. Eliminated showing COLLATE and NOT NULL properties for
domain-based fields.
7. Search in Metadata. Fixed the bug with hanging-up the program on trying to start
search with an empty string.
8. The 'Access Violation' arose when closing database if the connection to the server was
lost. The problem is fixed.
9. Main Menu | DataBase | Disconnect from DataBase: now works fine.
Version 3.8.0.1 - August 23, 2004
1. Duplicate Table: With this version you can copy the table data just as the table
structure.
2. Print Data View: Now you can customize column widths using the new dialog that is
accessible through the Tune Column Widths button on the toolbar of the Print View
tab.
3. Reports: With this version you can save your reports to XLS, RTF, HTML, JPEG, BMP,
and TIFF files. We have added the new save filters for this purpose.
4. Print Data View: Now the program saves page settings.
5. Print Data View: Now the program displays the table name on each page of the
report.

6. Print Data View: Fixed a bug that caused incorrect showing of the table report after
changing page parameters. Now the program correctly shows printable reports for
tables.
7. DB Explorer/Duplicate Object: fixed a bug that appeared when trying to duplicate an

object if the program established connection with two databases at once.
8. Export to Excel: We have added an ability to set values of the defined cells, merge
cells, and define the page background
9. Export Data: Fixed a bug with appearing of the dialog window when clicking the file
name in the edit field.
10. A bug with displaying and editing bigint fields is fixed.
Version 3.7.0.1 - January 19, 2004
1. We have significantly improved the Export Dialog. Now you can add notes,
hyperlinks, and charts based on exported data to Excel documents. You can also
define graphical styles for column captions, data, footer, and header on export to RTF
documents. A possibility to define strip styles is also included.
2. We have implemented the Dependency Tree tool. Now you can view all the object
dependencies in one diagram. To call this tool use the Tools | Dependency Tree menu
item, or the proper button in the toolbar of any object editor.
3. Now the Register Database dialog supports .fdb files.
4. We have implemented the BIGINT fields support for Firebird 1.5.
5. Edit Field: Now you can add the primary key using the Edit Field dialog if the table
has no primary key.
6. Extract Metadata: We have added a possibility of extracting views in a user defined

order.
7. Editor Options: We have added a new option allowing you to define if keyboard
templates apply in comment blocks or not.
8. We have added the "Number of dropping down items from object list in an editor
window" option on the Windows tab of the Environment Options dialog. This option
defines how many objects is displayed in the drop-down list of objects on the toolbar
of any object editor.
9. HTML Report: BIGINT fields and Universal triggers are shown correctly now.
10. A bug with using universal triggers in Firebird 1.5 is fixed.
11. Import from MS Access: One table appeared several times in the table list. Now it is
fixed.
12. Several minor improvements and bug fixes.

Version 3.6.5.1 - September 5, 2003
1. We've implemented the support of FireBird 1.5 universal triggers. Starting from this
version, IB Manager allows you to define several actions for a trigger, such as
BEFORE INSERT OR UPDATE, for example. The Trigger Editor has been slightly
redesigned for this purpose.
2. We've significantly improved the Import Data Wizard to make most of new abilities of
EMS QuickImport 2 component suite (http://www.ems-hitech.com/quickimport/) be
available in IB Manager, such as import from XML, import from multiple Excel sheets,
importing formulas from Excel, case insensitive replacements, and more. (*)
3. We've add a possibility to hide/show the DB Explorer tabs, such as Project, Windows
and Recent. If you don't need some of them to be shown on the screen, you can
uncheck the appropriate options on the DB Explorer tab of the Environment Options
dialog.
4. We've added the "Show only connected databases for services" option to the
Environment Options dialog. If this option is checked, only the connected databases
will be available in the service dialogs, such as Database Validation and Database
Statistics. This option is available on the Tools tab of the Environment Options dialog.
5. Fixed bug with skipping the first statement of a script during its execution from the
Script Editor in some cases.
6. If the list of the stored procedure parameters has been edited just before the
procedure execution, the procedure parameter order was generated incorrectly. Now
it is fixed.
7. Fixed bug with incorrect type of the last variable displaying in the Stored Procedure
Debugger in some cases. (*)
8. Fixed bug with generating the DDL for an object containing '#' or '%' character in its
name.
9. Fixed bug with displaying calculated fields in the Edit Field dialog.
10. Fixed bug with the search/replace function executed for the selected text only.
11. Some small improvements and minor corrections.
Version 3.6.0.1 - July 9, 2003
1. We have significantly improved Stored Procedure Debugger. Now it is possible to

trace into a procedure, executed from the current one, using the Trace Into button
and then return to a previous procedure quickly using the Run Until Return button.
These functions are also available through the F7 and Shift+F8 key shortcuts
respectively. (*)
2. We have added a Japanese localization to the IB Manager distributive package. Now

ten languages are available: English, German, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Russian,
Polish, Brazilian, Hungarian and Japanese.

3. We have extended a possibility to save diagrams as graphical images. Now you can
save your diagrams to four graphical file formats: bitmap, JPEG image, GIF image
and Windows metafile. This feature is available through the Save as Image button of
the Visual Database Designer toolbar. (*)
4. Object description definitions are now extracted as UPDATE ... SET

RDB$DESCRIPTION = ... statements for FireBird 1.x databases, since FireBird server
supports inserting multi-line strings to BLOB fields.
5. The Grant Manager provides two new menu items now: Grant All on All and Revoke
All on All. Use them for granting or revoking all privileges on all objects to the
current object at once.
6. Query parameters are parsed correctly by the Visual Query Builder now. (*)
7. Fixed bug with setting object names in lower or mixed case in object editors if
FireBird database is used.
8. Fixed bug with incorrect field order in the INSERT statement generated by the Export
As Insert dialog. (*)
9. NUMERIC and DECIMAL fields doesn't change their types to INTEGER or DOUBLE
PRECISION after trying to change the dimension anymore.
10. Now the Compare Scripts feature generates the result script correctly for tables with
different fields order.
11. The HTML Report generates trigger descriptions correctly now. (*)
12. The 'Transaction is active' doesn't appear anymore after calling the windows list
while the Data tab of the Table Editor is active.
13. Identifiers appearing in the IN (..) clause are parsed correctly by the Visual Query
Builder now. (*)
14. Fixed bug in the Stored Procedure Debugger with retrieving the count of variables if
type conversions are used in the procedure. (*)
15. Minor bugfixes and a lot of small improvements.
Version 3.5.0.1 - May 27, 2003
1. Visual Database Designer: we have added a possibility to save the diagram as a

bitmap. Now you can save you diagrams to graphical files using the Save As Image
button of the Visual Database Designer toolbar. (*)
2. Data View: we have added a possibility to set filter to the Grid View. Now you can
filter the current data view using drop-down arrows on the right of the column
captions.
3. The Create Procedure function is now available for views as well as for tables.

4. Now you can hide the Object Explorer tree from object editors permanently by
disabling the "Automatically show Object Explorer..." option on the Tools tab of the
Environment Options dialog.
5. The Validate Database option is now enabled default in the Database Validation
dialog to avoid the 'Unsuccessful execution...' error raised if no options were
selected.
6. DB Explorer: a database closes automatically now if the connection to it has been

lost for some reason. It prevents the application from hanging up due to impossibility
to disconnect from a database.
7. Export Data and Export Data as INSERT items are also available for views in the DB
Explorer now. (*)
8. Character set in the Print View corresponds to the database charset now. (*)
9. Fixed bug with representing the dependencies in view editor.
10. Fixed bug with adding a trigger using the object explorer of table editor. Now names
of trigger types appear correctly in the explorer.
11. Grant/Revoke on All menu item works correctly in the Grant Manager now.
12. Fixed bug with generating a wrong CREATE TABLE statement in the Export Data as
INSERT dialog in case of selecting the fields for export manually from the dual list.
(*)
13. Fixed bug with DATE/TIMESTAMP values format in the Stored Procedure Debugger.
(*)
14. Fixed bug with BLOB fields truncating during the import data process. (*)
15. Fixed bug with the 'CONTINUE record missing' error while importing data from some
Excel files. (*)
16. Query result does not become read-only anymore if more than one space appears
after the FROM keyword.
17. Fixed bug with the fetching status window in the SQL Editor if the Fetch All option is
enabled.
18. Fixed bug with using aggregate functions within the SELECT statement in the Visual
Query Builder. (*)
19. Some minor improvements and corrections.
Version 3.4.0.1 - April 21, 2003
1. We have significantly improved stored procedure/trigger parser as well as Stored

Procedure Debugger (*). Now it supports all SQL language extensions for FireBird 1.5
(such as defining variable in its declaration, EXECUTE VARCHAR syntax, CASE
syntax), IB 6.5 (such as ROWS syntax) and IB 7.0 (such as BOOLEAN type).

2. Extract Metadata Wizard: we have improved the algorithm of extracting stored

procedures to avoid conflicts during their creation. Now you can extract stored
procedures as a block of the CREATE PROCEDURE statements with empty bodies
preceding another block containing their actual bodies defined in the ALTER
PROCEDURE statements. This possibility can be disabled by the Environment Options
-> Tools -> Extract Metadata -> Extract stored procedures with empty bodies first
option, which is enabled by default.
3. We have added a possibility to load an Extract Metadata template automatically on

calling the wizard. Now you can set the "Environment Options -> Tools -> Extract
Metadata -> Automatically load template on run" option and select the template file
to load on each wizard execution.
4. Import Data Wizard: now you can log all the SQL commands executed during the
import process into a file. Use the Enable SQL Log option on the last step of the
wizard for this purpose. (*)
5. Now you can use CONTAINING and STARTING WITH syntax within the WHERE clause
in the Visual Query Builder. (*)
6. Fixed bug with "Transaction is not active" error occurrence on commit in the Import
Data Wizard. (*)
7. The Visual Query Builder doesn't slow down the system anymore. (*)
8. Fixed bugs with creating folder and adding objects to the Project View tree of the DB
Explorer.
9. Fixed bug with impossibility of saving changes in the SQL Script.
10. Now data table list is properly restored from a template in the Extract Metadata
Wizard.
11. Data exported to MS Access table started to print even if the corresponding option
was unchecked. Now it is fixed. (*)
12. Fixed bug with loading data into the BLOB Editor/Viewer using hexadecimal editor's
local menu. (*)
13. The UPDATE or INSERT mode of the Import Data Wizard imports data properly now.
(*)
14. Fixed bug with autogrants during creating a trigger.
15. Some small corrections and improvements.
Version 3.3.0.1 - March 12, 2003
1. InterBase 7.0 BOOLEAN type is supported by IB Manager now.
2. Import Data Wizard: a possibility of defining the import mode was added. Now you
can define how the records from the source file must be imported to the destination.

Six modes of data import are available, which allow you to add all records, add new
records only, update or delete existing records in various ways. (*)
3. Export Data Dialog: a possibility of customizing multi-file export was added to HTML
options. Now it is possible to set the maximal count of records in single file,
availability of index file and navigation options. (*)
4. Visual Query Builder: a possibility of diagram saving/loading was added. Now you
can save the current diagram layout to external file for later use. (*)
5. Page options were added to the PDF Options page of the Export Data Dialog. A
possibility to set page size, orientation and margins is available for export to PDF
format now. (*)
6. The Autoconnect On Startup option was added to the Database Registration Info
dialog.
7. If the Show Hosts option is enabled, databases are grouped by hosts now in the
database lists of all program tools, such as SQL Editor, Table Editor and others.
8. New InterBase 7.0 TMP$ objects are also marked as system now.
9. Fixed bug with impossibility of editing parameters and variables values of CHAR and
VARCHAR types in the Stored Procedure Debug window.
10. Fixed bug with multiplying of VARCHAR domain size by 3 in the Domain Editor if the
UNICODE_FSS character set was specified.
11. Fixed bug with the DDL improperly generated for multiple keys definitions.
12. Now it is possible to check/uncheck fields in the list when creating view or procedure
for a table from table editor.
13. Fixed bug with conversion exception raised in the Stored Procedure Debug window
for DATE parameters if system date format is different from InterBase one.
14. Fixed bug with impossibility of setting the Underline option for a font on the Color tab
of the Editor Options dialog.
15. Fixed bug with improper displaying of the CHECK expression in Domain Editor.
16. Fixed bug with generating field descriptions in the HTML Report.
17. Fixed bug with displaying system objects in the SQL Assistant if they are in
separated node.
18. Compare SQL Scripts: fixed bug in ALTER TRIGGER syntax. Also if two tables have
different primary keys, the DROP statement will be generated for the current primary
key of target table before the CREATE one,
19. Some minor corrections and improvements.

1. Visual Database Designer: customizing of the color palette and object appearance
was added. Now it is possible to change the appearance of the designer totally by
specifying colors and options on the Visual Database Designer tab of the Environment
Options dialog. *
2. Two new grid options were added in addition to the Fit columns widths to grid width
option: the Save grid view and Autofit columns options. The Save grid view option
should be chosen if you wish grid columns to be saved and restored during the next
session. The Autofit columns option will fit column widths to their most wide values.
3. The Set Defaults To All Child Windows item was added to the Windows menu. This
item sets all the child windows to their default sizes and positions. This function is
also available by Ctrl+Alt+D shortcut.
4. Data View: now it is possible to search for the desired value in the current column by
typing it in the grid, if the Enable auto search in grid option is checked.
5. The Always Open the Fields Tab option works properly now.
6. Fixed bug with using AltGr key for typing characters in editors.
7. Fixed bug with incorrect generation of the ON DELETE/ON UPDATE statements if

active program language is different from default.
8. Fixed bug with closing all the child windows even if the Cancel button was pushed in
exit confirmation dialog.
9. Fixed bug with disabling the Show servers in DB Explorer option in the Environment
Options dialog.
10. Fixed bug with hiding/showing the DB Explorer window by pressing the F11 key.
11. Some small improvements and minor corrections.
1. Autogrants functions were implemented. Now you can automatically grant privileges
to stored procedures, triggers and views. This feature is available via the
corresponding button of the procedure, trigger or view editor and also via the popup
menu in the DB Explorer. It's also possible to set grants when objects are compiled.
Set proper options on the Tools page of the Environment Options dialog for that
purpose.
2. A possibility to increase/decrease spin values in the grid cells using Ctrl+Up and
Ctrl+Down combinations instead of Up and Down. You can enable this feature by
setting the Use Ctrl+Up to increase spin values option on the Grid page of the
Environment Options dialog.
3. An ability to show only connected databases in the drop-down menus was added to
all object editors and database tools. This option can be enabled by the
corresponding check box on the Tools page of the Environment Options dialog.

4. The DB Explorer state (if it is visible or not) is stored in registry now.
5. The Smart Tabs option was added to the Editor Options dialog. Enable it if you want
to have tab width values depending on upper lines, or disable it if you want use tab
width values specified by the Tab Stops option.
6. Auto search feature is available in SQL Assistant, Visual Query Builder and Visual
Database Designer now.
7. Visual Database Designer: Delete key now closes active table(s) in a diagram,
Shift+Del is used to drop a table, Ctrl+Del deletes fields within an active table. *
8. A possibility to edit the page size manually added to the Create Database wizard.
9. Object descriptions are displayed properly in the DB Explorer if the Show Tables
Descriptions is on.
10. Stored Procedure Editor displays an error dialog if an exception was raised while
executing the procedure.
11. Fixed bug with 'Can't focus disabled or invisible window' error message after opening
the Table Editor with the Dependencies, Triggers or Description page active.
12. Fixed bug with closing the View Editor after recompiling.
13. Fixed bug with "Object ... in use" error during view recompiling.
14. Fixed bug with "List index out of bounds" error while changing autoincrement initial
value of a trigger.
15. Domain info is visible now in the Add/Edit Column dialog.
16. Fixed bug with extracting objects, which names begin from a digit symbol.
17. Fixed bug with program crashing during export BLOBs to DBF (see Export Data
Dialog). *
18. The Compare Script feature is unavailable until both files are specified. It prevents
from receiving the I/O error after pushing the Finish button when file name(s) are
not specified.
19. The Show Tips feature shows the next tip on startup now.
20. Fixed bug with the incorrect behavior of the View Procedure Header button in the
Stored Procedure Editor.
21. The External Tools submenu now available in the Tools menu (see External Tools).
22. The Set Default Link Color button works properly in the Visual Database Designer
now. *
23. Fixed bug with improper behavior of child windows in MDI environment mode.

24. Some small improvements and corrections.
1. Dutch localization was added to IB Manager distribution package. Now six languages
are supported: English, German, Italian, Spanish, Dutch and Russian. This list will
expand from version to version. You can change the program language by the
Options | Select program language... menu item. IB Manager also allows you to
select your language preference at first startup.
See Select Program Language.
2. Visual Query Builder was updated to the latest version of EMS QueryBuilder suite
(http://www.ems-hitech.com/querybuilder/). A lot of small improvements and
corrections. *
3. Database Tools (e.g. SQL Editor, Visual Query Builder *, Visual Database Designer *)
now switch to the active database automatically each time when the tool window
becomes active.
3. Visual Database Designer: a possibility to hide/show grid in database objects was

added. This option is available in the Visual Database Designer window through the
Show Grid In Objects item of the Display Mode button drop-down menu. *
4. SQL Script: now the database drop-down list updates itself in compliance with the
databases currently active and reverts to its initial state if the assigned database
closes.
5. User Manager window behaviour was changed. It is not a modal window now and it
looks like other child windows of the application.
6. Print Metadata window has also changed its style. *
7. Visual Database Designer & Visual Query Builder: these two windows were
redesigned to avoid undesirable toolbar behaviour. *
8. Login prompt dialog appears now if password is not specified in the database
registration info.
9. "FDB" file extension became a registered file type. Now you're able to register/open
FireBird databases by starting a database file from Windows shell.
10. Some corrections were applied to the User Manager. Adding role and some other
functionality is now available.
11. Fixed bug with "List index out of bounds" error in the Search In Metadata function.
Several minor bugs were also fixed.
12. Compare Scripts Wizard: fixed bug with CHAR/VARCHAR fields which have default
values containing more than one word.
13. DB Explorer: fixed bug with disappearing object names in the SQL Assistant after
switching from the Databases tab to the Windows tab and back again.

14. Some minor bugfixes and small improvements.
Version 3.0 - December 16, 2002
1. New features – new name!

QuickDesk changes its name to IB Manager!
2. New, modern, and fully customizable user interface!

See Visual Options for details.
3. MDI Interface implemented

Microsoft Office Style - all program windows are child windows of the main window
now. You can customize the Environment Style using the the Environment Options
window.
4. HTML Report Generator

Create a detailed HTML report about your database quickly.
5. New Visual Query Builder

Full support of FB 1.x and IB 6.5 select enhancements.
6. Plan Analyzer
Helping you easily understand the query optimization plans in SQL Editor.
7. Multilanguage support
Spanish, Italian, German and Russian localizations available, Dutch localization is
coming soon
8. Backup and Restore Templates

Make backup and restore even more quickly.
9. New Compare SQL Scripts Module

Working much better than the previous one
10. Data Export to PDF and MS Access

Two more popular formats added

1.9 Other EMS Products
Quick navigation
MySQL Microsoft SQL PostgreSQL InterBase / Oracle IBM DB2 DBISAM Tools &
FireBird components
MySQL
SQL Management Studio for MySQL
EMS SQL Management Studio for MySQL is a complete solution for database administration and
development. SQL Studio unites the must-have tools in one powerful and easy-to-use environment
that will make you more productive than ever before!
SQL Manager for MySQL

Simplify and automate your database development process, design, explore and maintain existing
databases, build compound SQL query statements, manage database user rights and manipulate data
in different ways.
Data Export for MySQL

Export your data to any of 15 most popular data formats, including MS Access, MS Excel, MS Word,
PDF, HTML and more.
Data Import for MySQL

Import your data from MS Access, MS Excel and other popular formats to database tables via
user-friendly wizard interface.
Data Pump for MySQL

Migrate from most popular databases (MySQL, PostgreSQL, Oracle, DB2, InterBase/Firebird, etc.) to
MySQL.
Data Generator for MySQL

Generate test data for database testing purposes in a simple and direct way. Wide range of data
generation parameters.
DB Comparer for MySQL

Compare and synchronize the structure of your databases. Move changes on your development
database to production with ease.
DB Extract for MySQL

Create database backups in the form of SQL scripts, save your database structure and table data as a
whole or partially.
SQL Query for MySQL

Analyze and retrieve your data, build your queries visually, work with query plans, build charts based
on retrieved data quickly and more.
Data Comparer for MySQL

Compare and synchronize the contents of your databases. Automate your data migrations from
development to production database.
Scroll to top
Microsoft SQL

SQL Management Studio for SQL Server

EMS SQL Management Studio for SQL Server is a complete solution for database administration and
SQL Manager for SQL Server

databases, build compound SQL query statements, manage database user rights and manipulate
data in different ways.
Data Export for SQL Server

PDF, HTML and more
Data Import for SQL Server

Data Pump for SQL Server

Migrate from most popular databases (MySQL, PostgreSQL, Oracle, DB2, InterBase/Firebird, etc.) to
Microsoft® SQL Server™.
Data Generator for SQL Server

DB Comparer for SQL Server

DB Extract for SQL Server

Create database backups in the form of SQL scripts, save your database structure and table data as
a whole or partially.
SQL Query for SQL Server

Data Comparer for SQL Server

Scroll to top
PostgreSQL
SQL Management Studio for PostgreSQL
EMS SQL Management Studio for PostgreSQL is a complete solution for database administration and
SQL Manager for PostgreSQL

Data Export for PostgreSQL

PDF, HTML and more

Data Import for PostgreSQL

Data Pump for PostgreSQL

Migrate from most popular databases (MySQL, SQL Server, Oracle, DB2, InterBase/Firebird, etc.) to
PostgreSQL.
Data Generator for PostgreSQL

DB Comparer for PostgreSQL

DB Extract for PostgreSQL

SQL Query for PostgreSQL

Data Comparer for PostgreSQL

Scroll to top
InterBase / Firebird
SQL Management Studio for InterBase/Firebird
EMS SQL Management Studio for InterBase and Firebird is a complete solution for database
administration and development. SQL Studio unites the must-have tools in one powerful and
easy-to-use environment that will make you more productive than ever before!
SQL Manager for InterBase/Firebird

Data Export for InterBase/Firebird

PDF, HTML and more
Data Import for InterBase/Firebird

Data Pump for InterBase/Firebird

Migrate from most popular databases (MySQL, SQL Server, Oracle, DB2, PostgreSQL, etc.) to
InterBase/Firebird.
Data Generator for InterBase/Firebird


DB Comparer for InterBase/Firebird

DB Extract for InterBase/Firebird

SQL Query for InterBase/Firebird

Data Comparer for InterBase/Firebird

Scroll to top
Oracle
SQL Management Studio for Oracle
EMS SQL Management Studio for Oracle is a complete solution for database administration and
SQL Manager for Oracle

in different ways.
Data Export for Oracle

PDF, HTML and more.
Data Import for Oracle

Data Pump for Oracle

Migrate from most popular databases (MySQL, PostgreSQL, MySQL, DB2, InterBase/Firebird, etc.) to
Oracle
Data Generator for Oracle

DB Comparer for Oracle

DB Extract for Oracle

whole or partially.
SQL Query for Oracle


Data Comparer for Oracle

Scroll to top
DB2
SQL Management Studio for DB2
EMS SQL Management Studio for DB2 is a complete solution for database administration and
SQL Manager for DB2

in different ways.
Data Export for DB2

PDF, HTML and more.
Data Import for DB2

Data Pump for DB2

Migrate from most popular databases (MySQL, PostgreSQL, Oracle, MySQL, InterBase/Firebird, etc.)
to DB2
Data Generator for DB2

DB Comparer for DB2

DB Extract for DB2

whole or partially.
SQL Query for DB2

Data Comparer for DB2

Scroll to top
DBISAM
SQL Manager for DBISAM
Scroll to top

Tools & components

Advanced Data Export
Advanced Data Export Component Suite (for Borland Delphi and .NET) will allow you to save your
data in the most popular office programs formats.
Advanced Data Import

Advanced Data Import™ Component Suite for Delphi® and C++ Builder® will allow you to import
your data to the database from files in the most popular data formats.
Advanced PDF Generator

Advanced PDF Generator for Delphi gives you an opportunity to create PDF documents with your
applications written on Delphi® or C++ Builder®.
Advanced Query Builder

Advanced Query Builder is a powerful component suite for Borland® Delphi® and C++ Builder®
intended for visual building SQL statements for the SELECT, INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE clauses.
Advanced Excel Report

Advanced Excel Report for Delphi is a powerful band-oriented generator of template-based reports in
MS Excel.
Advanced Localizer
Advanced Localizer™ is an indispensable component suite for Delphi® for adding multilingual support
to your applications.
Source Rescuer
EMS Source Rescuer™ is an easy-to-use wizard application for Borland Delphi® and C++Builder®
which can help you to restore your lost source code.
Scroll to top

Part
II
2 Getting started
SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird provides you with an ability to contribute
to efficient InterBase/Firebird administration and development using a variety of
available tools easily and quickly.
The succeeding chapters of this document are intended to inform you about the tools
implemented in SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird. Please see the instructions
below to learn how to perform various operations in the easiest way.
· Selecting style and language
· How the application looks when you start it for the first time
· Using Desktop Panel
· Database navigation
· Working with database objects
· Using context menus
· Switching between child windows
Enjoy your work with SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird!

See also:
Database Explorer
Database management
Database objects management
Query management tools
Data management
Import/Export tools
Database tools
Server tools
Personalization
External tools

2.1 Selecting style and language

Before you start SQL Manager for the first time, you have to choose the environment
style and the interface language. You can always change these settings using the
Environment Options dialog (Options | Environment Options...) to configure the
environment style and the Select Language dialog (Options | Select Program
Language...) to change the program language.
Environment style
This switch allows you to define the main window behavior style - MDI (like in MS
Office applications) or Floating windows (like Borland Delphi IDE).
Bar style for child forms

Here you can define the location of action buttons: within the Navigation bar (on the
left) and/or on the Toolbar.
Program Language
Select the interface language from the list of available languages.
See also:
First time started
Using Desktop Panel

Database navigation
Working with database objects
Using context menus
Switching windows

2.2 First time started

This is how SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird looks when you start it for the
first time. Use the Desktop panel to fulfill any of common tasks: Create a new database,
Manage existing database(s), and a several tasks which do not require database
registration, i.e. Execute SQL script, accessing the help system or using access
available Internet resources.
The main menu allows you to perform various Database operations, open To-Do List and
activate/deactivate Database Explorer, SQL Assistant and various toolbars within the
View menu, manage your databases using items of the Tools and Services menus,
customize the application using the Options menu, manage SQL Manager Windows
using Window List and other tools, view the Tip of the Day and access Registration
information and product documentation using the corresponding items available within
the Help menu.
To start working with your InterBase/Firebird, you should first register the host using
Register Host wizard. After that you need to register one or several databases using
Register Database Wizard.
By default the corresponding Register Host , Register Database buttons are

available on the toolbar and within the Database menu.
When the database connection settings are specified, you can set connection to your
database and proceed to Database navigation, Database Objects management, working
with SQL queries and other tools of SQL Manager.

See also:
Selecting style and language
Using Desktop Panel
Database navigation
Using context menus
Switching windows

2.3 Using Desktop Panel

Desktop Panel is the area that is visible when no child windows are open in SQL
Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird. The working area of Desktop Panel is divided into
four sections: Getting Started, Database Tools, Help and Support, Internet Resources.
Using the Desktop Panel items you can:

· create a new InterBase/Firebird database;
· register existing database(s) to operate them afterwards in SQL Manager;
· create a new table within the current database using the New Table window (this
item is available if there is at least one active database connection);
· create a new database object within the current database (this item is available if
there is at least one active database connection);
· execute a script using SQL Script Editor;
· execute a SQL query (this item is available if there is at least one active database
connection);
· grant permissions on database objects to InterBase/Firebird users using Grant
Manager (this item is available if there is at least one active database connection);
· show this help file;
· browse SQL Manager 2008 on-line documentation;
· visit SQL Manager 2008 Home Page;
· go to Technical Support Center;
· look through the Frequently Asked Questions page.

See also:
First time started
Database navigation
Using context menus
Switching windows

2.4 Database navigation

After you have registered the required database(s), the corresponding alias(es) appear in
the DB Explorer tree on the left. If the Show Hosts option is checked on the
Environment Options | DB Explorer page, the host nodes are also displayed in the tree
(alternatively, you can use the Show Hosts item of the Database context menu, or the
drop-down menu of the View Mode toolbar button for the same purpose). If
necessary, you can also specify that empty schemas should be hidden in the tree: use
the corresponding option available on the DB Explorer page of the Environment Options
dialog.
To connect to a database, simply double-click its alias (or select the database alias in DB
Explorer and press Enter). If the connection is successful, the database node expands
into a tree of objects. To select the types of objects to be expanded upon successful
database connection, you can use the Expand on connection group of the Environment
Options | DB Explorer page.
Now you can navigate within the database objects. Use SQL Assistant to get extended
information about the currently selected object.
For your convenience objects having different status (e.g. enabled/disabled) are
displayed with different icons in Database Explorer.
See also:

First time started

Using Desktop Panel
Using context menus
Switching windows

2.5 Working with database objects

The nodes of the DB Explorer tree allow you to access server objects and objects of the
selected database respectively. If InterBase/Firebird you are connected to supports
certain types of objects, their nodes will appear in the tree. Double-click an object to
open it in the corresponding editor.
Right-click an object to display its context menu which allows you to perform various
operations over the selected object or database.
If you want to use the DB Explorer tree for working with table subobjects (fields,
indexes, Foreign keys, etc.), check the Show table subobjects option which is available

within the General options group of the Environment Options | DB Explorer page (you
can also use the Show Table Subobjects menu item in the drop-down menu of the
View Mode toolbar button for the same purpose.)
See also:
First time started
Using Desktop Panel
Database navigation
Using context menus
Switching windows

2.6 Using context menus

The context menus are aimed at facilitating your work with SQL Manager 2008 for
InterBase/Firebird: you can perform a variety of operations using context menu items.
Select an object in DB Explorer and right-click its alias to open the context menu.
· Host context menu
· Database context menu
· Object context menu
See also:
First time started
Using Desktop Panel
Database navigation
Switching windows
2.6.1 Host context menu

The context menu of a Host in the DB Explorer tree allows you to:
· access server objects and common services available in the Tasks submenu;
· view/edit the selected host properties within the Host Registration Info dialog;
· create a new database at the selected host;
· register a new database using Register Database Wizard;
· register a new host using Register Host Wizard;
· unregister the selected Host;
· configure representation of hosts and databases in Database Explorer;
· create a new tab for the selected Host to access it through this tab quickly and/or
manage the existing tab;
· search for an object within the tree.

See also:
Database context menu
Object context menu
2.6.2 Database context menu

The context menu of a registered database in the DB Explorer tree allows you to:
· connect to the selected database (if connection to the database is not active yet);
· disconnect from the selected database (if connection to the database has been
already activated);
· access database tools available in the Tasks submenu;
· view/edit the Database properties;
· view/edit the host properties within the Host Registration Info dialog;
· create a new database at the host where the selected database resides;
· drop the selected database;
· register a new database using Register Database Wizard;
· unregister the selected database;
· view/edit the selected database registration information within the Database
Registration Info dialog;
· register a new host using Register Host Wizard;
· unregister the Host where the selected database resides;
· generate the database script and open it in SQL Editor;
· generate the database script and copy its text to Windows clipboard;
· configure representation of hosts and databases in Database Explorer;
· refresh the selected database;
· test connection to the database (or reconnect if connection has been already
established);

· create a new tab for the selected database to access it through this tab quickly
and/or manage the existing tab;
See also:
Node context menu
Object context menu
2.6.3 Object context menu

The context menu of an object (e.g. table) in the DB Explorer tree allows you to:
· create a new database object of the same type;
· edit the selected object in its editor;
· rename the selected object;
· drop the selected object from the database;
· duplicate the selected object (create a new object with the same DDL structure and
properties as the selected object has);
· access common Tasks applied to this object;
· perform data manipulation operations (for tables and views);
· view properties (for tables);

· define grants for the selected object;

· generate the object script and open it in SQL Editor;
· generate the database script and copy its text to Windows clipboard;
· refresh all objects of the selected object type;
· view/edit the database registration information within the Database Registration Info
dialog (for database objects);
· create a new tab for the selected object to access it through this tab quickly and/or
manage the existing tab;
See also:
Node context menu
Database context menu

2.7 Switching windows

The Windows Toolbar of SQL Manager allows you to switch between child windows
easily, like in Windows Task Bar.
To activate the window you need, simply click one of the window buttons. To perform
some additional actions with the window, right-click its tab and select the corresponding
menu item from the popup menu.
If you have multiple windows opened, you can also switch between them using the
Ctrl+Tab shortcut.
See also:
First time started
Using Desktop Panel
Database navigation
Using context menus

Part
III
3 Database Explorer
Database Explorer (or DB Explorer) is the basic window of SQL Manager 2008 for
InterBase/Firebird for navigation within databases and working with database and server
objects. The tree-like structure of DB Explorer allows you to manage the databases,
database and server objects and perform other everyday operations quickly and easily.
The following list contains the most frequently used features provided by Database
Explorer.
· Managing database registration info
· Connecting to databases
· Performing basic operations upon database objects
· Selecting multiple objects
· Navigating database objects using multiple tabs
· Easy access to recently opened objects
· Creating projects to work with selected objects only
· Searching within the tree
· Viewing extended information about database objects
· Configuring Database Explorer
· Managing Favorite queries

To view/hide the Database Explorer window, use the View | DB Explorer main menu
item or press the F11 key.
Use the Ctrl+Shift+C shortcut to collapse current DB Explorer tree branch and switch to
the parent node.
See also:
Getting started
Database management


Data management
Import/Export tools
Database tools
Server tools
Personalization
External tools

3.1 Managing database registration info

After you have created and/or registered your database in SQL Manager 2008 for
InterBase/Firebird, you can perform a number of operations with the database using the
context menu.
If you need to view/edit the registration information of a database, right-click the

database alias in DB Explorer and select the Database Registration Info... context
menu item to open the Database Registration Info dialog.
See also:
Connecting to databases
Operations with database objects

Selecting multiple objects

Using tabs for database navigation
Recently opened objects
Creating projects
Searching within the tree
SQL Assistant
Configuring Database Explorer
Managing Favorite queries

3.2 Connecting to databases

When the InterBase/Firebird host is registered, and the database registration is
complete, you can establish connection to your database.
The simplest way to connect to a database is to double-click its alias in the Database
Explorer tree. The same operation can be performed by selecting the Connect to
Database item of the database alias context menu, or by using the Database |
Connect to Database main menu item.
Alternatively, you can use the Shift+Ctrl+C shortcut to connect to your database.

Note that you can change database aliases order by dragging within the DB Explorer
tree.
See also:
Managing database registration info
Creating projects
SQL Assistant

3.3 Operations with database objects

Database Explorer allows you to perform various operations with database objects and
server objects.
To open an object in its editor, you can double-click the object in the DB Explorer tree.
You can also right-click an object within the DB Explorer tree and use its context menu
of to perform a number of operations:
· create a new object (the New <object>... item);
· edit currently selected object (the Edit <object_name>... item);
· rename currently selected object (the Rename <object_name>... item);
· drop the selected object from the database (the Drop <object_name>... item);
· duplicate the selected object (the Duplicate <object_name>... item);
· define grants for the selected object (the Grants for <object_name>... item).
Note that the context menu contains object-specific items only when the object is
currently selected in DB Explorer.
Using drag-and-drop operations you can add objects to SQL Editor, Visual Query Builder

or SQL Script Editor. For your convenience the Insert to editor dialog is implemented.
The dialog allows you to specify the statement to be inserted into the editor. If
necessary, you can edit the generated statement manually.
See also:
Creating projects
SQL Assistant

3.4 Selecting multiple objects

You can select more than one object in Database Explorer by pressing the Ctrl or the
Shift key and selecting multiple objects one by one.
The context menu of several selected objects allows you to:

· create a new database object of the same type;
· edit the selected objects (for database objects);
· drop the selected objects;
· perform other operations with the first of the selected objects (see Operations with
database objects).

See also:
Creating projects
SQL Assistant

3.5 Using tabs for database navigation

To make your work with Database Explorer even more convenient, the capability of
working with several tabs is implemented.
You can use tabs when you wish to work with a particular node of the DB Explorer tree
only: with one specific schema, or with tables of some schema, or with a specific
database project. Creating such tabs will minimize scrolling within large trees, you only
need to switch between them with a single click on the corresponding tab.
Creating tabs
In order to create a new tab:

· right-click the node for which you wish to create a tab and select the New Tab from
Here... context menu item.
Renaming tabs
In order to rename a tab:

· switch to the tab by clicking its caption (there can be only one active tab, and it is
differentiated by a different color);
· right-click within the DB Explorer area and select the Rename Current Tab...
context menu item.
Removing tabs
In order to remove a tab:

· switch to the tab by clicking its caption (there can be only one active tab, and it is
differentiated by a different color);
· right-click within the DB Explorer area and select the Delete Current Tab context
menu item.
Note: Navigation through the tabs is also possible with the help of the following
shortcuts:
· Ctrl+Shift+N - move to the next tab;
· Ctrl+Shift+P - move to the previous tab.
See also:


Creating projects
SQL Assistant

3.6 Recently opened objects

Use the Recent Objects button available on the DB Explorer toolbar to access the
list of recently opened database objects (during the current session).
This list is common for all registered databases. Next to the object name the database
name and the host are displayed. Select an object from this list to open it using its
editor.
To change the number of objects that are considered 'recent', select the Options |
Environment Options main menu item, proceed to the Tools | DB Explorer section
within the Environment Options dialog, and set the Recent objects count option
value (see Environment Options for details).
See also:
Creating projects
SQL Assistant

3.7 Creating projects

Use the Projects node for each database to work with the selected objects of this
database only. You can place any object from the database tree here.
You can also create a separate tab for your project. See Using tabs for database
navigation section for details.
Creating project folders
In order to create a new folder:

· create a folder (if necessary, you can create subfolders inside the project folder) by
right-clicking the Projects node and selecting the New Sub Folder... context menu
item;
· enter the folder name within the New Folder dialog.
Adding objects

In order to add a new object to the project folder:

· extent the Projects node in DB Explorer;
· drag an object (or multiple objects) from the database tree to the project folder
or
· right-click the project folder and select the Add Object... context menu item, or use
the Ins key;
· use the Select Object dialog to specify objects to be added to the project folder.
Removing objects from the project
In order to remove an object from the project:

· right-click the object and select the Remove <object_name> from Project
context menu item, or use the Shift+Ctrl+Del shortcut;
· confirm removing in the dialog window.
Note: This operation does not drop the object from the database, but only removes its
alias from the project tree.
See also:


SQL Assistant

3.8 Searching within the tree

SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird provides an ability to search for items within
the DB Explorer tree. Searching for items may be useful if you have a lot of database
objects, and it may be sometimes hard to find the one you need.
There are two search facilities implemented in SQL Manager for your convenience. You
can search for items within the DB Explorer tree in either of the following ways:
· using the Find Item dialog
To call the Find Item dialog, right-click the Database alias or any of the database
objects in the DB Explorer tree and select the Find Item... context menu item, or use
the Ctrl+F key shortcut.
Note that you can specify whether the search will be performed within the entire tree or
within the currently selected node only: use the Search on categories option
available within the Tools | DB Explorer section of the Environment Options dialog.
· using the Search Panel

Type in the first letters in the edit-box, and the corresponding object will be highlighted
in the tree, as displayed in the picture below.

By default, the Search Panel is activated in the upper area of DB Explorer. To disable
the panel, right-click within the panel and deselect the checkbox at the corresponding
popup menu item.
Hint: The Search Panel is dockable, i.e. you can drag it to any location within the DB
Explorer form.
See also:


Viewing query history
Creating projects
SQL Assistant

3.9 SQL Assistant

SQL Assistant which is located at the bottom of the Database Explorer window helps
you to work with your database objects. Depending on the current selection in DB
Explorer, the SQL Assistant area displays additional information about the selected
object.
If you select a database in DB Explorer, SQL Assistant displays the list of the database
object groups and the number of objects in each group.
Selecting an object group in DB Explorer displays the list of the objects in SQL
Assistant. Double-clicking the object name in SQL Assistant makes the object available
for editing in the appropriate editor. The context menu of the object or group of objects
(selected with the Ctrl or Shift keys pressed) allows you to edit or drop the selected
objects.
If you select a table or a view in DB Explorer, SQL Assistant displays the list of the table
subobjects (e.g. fields and their types) by default. What is displayed in SQL Assistant
when a table or a view is selected in DB Explorer depends on the Table Details / View
Details selection. Click the View Mode toolbar button and select the Table Details
| Show... (or View Details | Show...) drop-down menu item, or use the context menu
of SQL Assistant. Possible values are: Show Fields, Show Foreign Keys, Show Checks,
Show Indices, Show Triggers, Show Table Info, Show DDL, Show Description (for
tables); Show Fields, Show Indexes, Show Triggers, Show DDL, Show Description (for
views).
If you select a procedure or a user-defined function in DB Explorer, SQL Assistant

lists its parameters by default. Use the Procedure and UDF Details | Show... context
menu item within the SQL Assistant area to define the content of SQL Assistant when a
procedure or a user-defined function is selected in DB Explorer. Possible values are:
Show Parameters, Show DDL, Show Description.
Selecting other objects in DB Explorer displays the definition in SQL Assistant by

default. Use the Other Objects' Details | Show... context menu item within the SQL

Assistant area to define the content of SQL Assistant when an object is selected in DB
Explorer. Possible values are: Show DDL, Show Description.
You can also use SQL Assistant to work with your queries quickly. You can
drag-and-drop object aliases to the SQL Editor, Visual Query Builder or SQL Script Editor
working area, in the same way as this operation is performed in Database Explorer.
See also:
Creating projects

3.10 Configuring Database Explorer

Use the View Mode toolbar button to configure Database Explorer according to
your needs.
The drop-down menu called upon clicking this button allows you to:
· show/hide table subobjects as child nodes of tables;
· show/hide view subobjects as child nodes of views;
· show/hide host nodes for registered databases;
· sort the list of databases by their aliases in the DB Explorer tree;
· show/hide disconnected databases;
· show/hide procedure subobjects
· show/hide UDF subobjects
· show/hide Error
· configure table/view/procedure/UDF/other objects' details for the SQL Assistant area.
Use the DB Explorer section of the Environment Options dialog (Options | Environment
Options...) to see more options to configure Database Explorer.
See also:


Creating projects
SQL Assistant

3.11 Managing Favorite queries

Favorite Queries is a new feature of SQL Manager. Now you are provided with an
opportunity to save the most frequently used SQL queries as Favorite Queries.
Use the Favorite Queries node of DB Explorer to access the list of your Favorite queries
quickly. Queries stored in the database and those stored in Windows registry can be
easily distinguished by their icons.
Using the context menu you can create a new Favorite query or edit an existing one
using Favorites editor, open any of the existing queries in SQL Editor or remove a query
if you don't need it any longer.
You can also create a separate tab for your Favorite queries. See Using tabs for database
navigation section for details.
See also:
Creating projects
SQL Assistant

Part
IV
4 Database management
SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird provides a number of tools you may need
to manage your InterBase/Firebird databases.
Find the list of common database management operations for working in SQL Manager
below.
Registering Hosts
In order to register a Host in SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird:

· select the Database | Register Host... main menu item or use the corresponding
Register Host toolbar button
or
· right-click the Host and select the Register Host... context menu item in the DB
Explorer tree;
· set all the necessary options using Register Host wizard which guides you through the
entire process of Host registration.
Unregistering Hosts
In order to unregister a Host in SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird:

· select the Host to unregister in the DB Explorer tree;
· select the Database | Unregister Host main menu item or use the corresponding
Unregister Host toolbar button
or
· right-click the Host and select the Unregister Host context menu item in the DB
Explorer tree;
· confirm unregistering in the corresponding dialog window.
Viewing and editing Server Properties
In order to view/edit Server properties in SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird:

· select the host or a database that resides on this host in the DB Explorer tree;
· right-click the host or the database alias and select the Server Properties context
menu item.
Creating Databases
In order to create a Database in SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird:

· select the Database | Create Database main menu item or use the corresponding
Create Database toolbar button;
· set all the necessary options using Create Database wizard which guides you through
the entire process of creating a new database.
Dropping Databases
In order to drop a Database in SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird:

· select the Database to drop in the DB Explorer tree;
· select the Database | Drop Database main menu item;
· confirm dropping in the corresponding dialog window.

Registering Databases
In order to register a single Database in SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird:

· select the Database | Register Database... main menu item or use the
corresponding Register Database toolbar button
or
· right-click the Database and select the Register Database... context menu item in
the DB Explorer tree;
· set all the necessary options using Register Database wizard which guides you
through the entire process of Database registration.
Unregistering Databases
In order to unregister a Database in SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird:

· select the Database to unregister in the DB Explorer tree;
· select the Database | Unregister Database main menu item or use the
corresponding Unregister Database toolbar button
or
· right-click the Database and select the Unregister Database context menu item in
the DB Explorer tree;
· confirm unregistering in the corresponding dialog window.
Connecting to Databases
In order to connect to a Database in SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird:

· select the Database to connect to in the DB Explorer tree;
· select the Database | Connect to Database main menu item or use the
corresponding Connect to Database toolbar button
or
· right-click the Database and select the Connect to Database context menu item in
the DB Explorer tree.
Disconnecting from Databases
In order to disconnect from a Database in SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird:

· select the Database to disconnect from in the DB Explorer tree;
· select the Database | Disconnect from Database main menu item or use the
corresponding Disconnect from Database toolbar button
or
· right-click the Database and select the Disconnect from Database context menu
item in the DB Explorer tree.
Viewing and editing Database Registration Info
In order to view/edit Database Registration Info in SQL Manager 2008 for

InterBase/Firebird:
· select the Database or any of its objects in the DB Explorer tree;
· select the Database | Database Registration Info... main menu item
or
· right-click the Database or any of its objects and select the Database Registration
Info... context menu item in the DB Explorer tree.

Viewing and editing Database Properties
In order to view/edit Database properties in SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird:

· select the Database in the DB Explorer tree;
· right-click the Database and select the Database Properties... context menu item
or use the corresponding Properties toolbar button
See also:
Getting started
Database Explorer
Data management
Import/Export tools
Database tools
Server tools
Personalization
External tools

4.1 Register Host wizard

Register Host wizard allows you to register a host in SQL Manager 2008 for
InterBase/Firebird.
To start the wizard, select the Database | Register Host... main menu item, or use the
Register Host button on the main toolbar. You can also use the Shift+Ctrl+R
shortcut for the same purpose.
· Setting connection parameters

· SSH connection settings
· Setting specific options
See also:
Create Database wizard

Register Database wizard

Database Registration Info
Database Properties
Host Registration Info
4.1.1 Setting connection parameters

Use this step of the wizard to set the necessary connection parameters for the new
Host using the corresponding boxes and options: Host name, Authentication, User name
and Password.
Select network protocol, specify the host you are going to work with: type in the host
name in the Host name field or select one in the drop-down list.and enter valid
port/service.

Specify the preferable Network protocol (Local, TCP/IP, NetBEUI, Novel SPX), at the
Host field please type an InterBase/Firebird host name in. Enter InterBase/Firebird
port/service to connect through in the Port field. (gds_db for InterBase and port 3050 for
Firebird by default).
Authentication type
Specify the type of InterBase/Firebird authentication to be used for the connection.
For successful connection to the server it is crucial to use the appropriate client library -
the one that is compatible with the server you are using: gds32.dll for Interbase and
fbclient.dll for Firebird. Please note that the client library file must be located on your
local machine (e.g. in the directory where the utility is installed). Press Detect
Automatically for automatic client selection.
Use Secure Shell (SSH) tunneling

The use of this option allows you to connect to hosts over a Secure Shell Tunnel. The
traffic is encrypted to protect individual and corporate data.
Click the Next button to proceed to the Setting specific options step or to the SSH
connection settings step of the wizard, depending on whether the Use Secure Shell
(SSH) tunneling option has been selected or not.
4.1.2 SSH connection settings

To setup the connection via SSH tunnel, input the following values in the corresponding
fields:
· SSH host name is the name of the host where SSH server is running
· SSH port indicates the port where SSH server is activated
· SSH user name stands for the user on the machine where SSH server is running
(Note: it is a Linux/Windows user, not a user of InterBase/Firebird server)
· SSH password is the Linux/Windows user password
Use Private Key for authentication

If the SSH encryption is enabled on the SSH server, a user can generate a pair of
cryptographic keys (the Private key and the Public key). The Public key is placed on
the SSH server, and the Private key is the part you keep secret inside a secure box that
can only be opened with the correct passphrase (or an empty string as the passphrase).
When you wish to access the remote system, you open the secure box with your
passphrase (if any), and use the private key to authenticate yourself with the Public key
on the remote Linux computer.
SSH Key file

Specify the location (the secure box) of the Private key file on your local machine.
Supported Private Key file formats are:
OpenSSH
Putty
SSH.com
Note that you need to trust your local machine not to scrape your passphrase or a copy
of your Private key file while it is out of its secure box.

Click the Next button to proceed to the Setting specific options step of the wizard.
4.1.3 Setting specific options

Specify the location of client library and server security database; set some specific
options for registered host.
Login prompt before connection

Enables SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird to prompt for user name and password
each time you connect to the database.
Autoconnect on startup
Check the option to set the automatic connection to the host on startup.
Connect to the host automatically when connecting to any its database.

When checked, automatically connects to the host when trying to connect to any of its

databases.
Don't show client library warnings

Turn this option on to skip the message of client library version incompatibility.
Create new tab for this host

Checking this option adds a new tab to the bar, making navigation easier.
The Detect Automatically button allows you to locate path to client library and security
database automatically.
Authorized InterBase/Firebird users are stored in a security database. Each

InterBase/Firebird has its own security database, which means that a user definition is
bound to the server where it is stored. The security database also stores an encrypted
password for each user.
Client library provides the conduit between the API or object library an application uses
to communicate with the DB server and the networking protocols used to exchange data
with the network.

Click Finish button when done to start working with the selected host in SQL Manager
2008 for InterBase/Firebird.

4.2 Create Database wizard

Create Database wizard allows you to create a new database on your
InterBase/Firebird host.
To start the wizard, select the Database | Create Database... main menu item, or use
the Create Database button on the main toolbar.
· Setting database name

· Setting connection properties
· Defining database files
· Viewing result SQL statement
See also:
Register Host wizard
Database Properties

4.2.1 Setting database name

Use this step of the wizard to select the host for the database being created.
Click the Next button to proceed to the Setting connection properties step of the wizard.
4.2.2 Setting connection properties

Use this step of the wizard to set the necessary connection parameters for the
database being created.

Database file
A new database file specification, including full name of database file. E.g. if you use
protocol TCP/IP to access server "myserver" and you want to create database
"mydatabase" in folder "bases" on disc C, you should fill this edit field like is shown:
c:\bases\mydatabase.gdb
User Name
Checks the user name against valid user name and password combinations in the
security database on the server where the database will reside.
Password
Checks the password against valid user name and password combinations in the security
database on the server where the database will reside.
Page Size
Size, in bytes, for database pages. Can be 1024, 2048, 4096 (default), or 8192.
Charset
Sets default character set for a database charset; if omitted, character set defaults to
NONE.
SQL Dialect
Declares the SQL Dialect for database access.

SQL Dialect Used for

1 InterBase 5.5 and earlier compatibility
3 InterBase 6.0; allows you to use delimited identifiers, exact numerics,
and DATE, TIME, and TIMESTAMP datatypes
Single Database File

If you want to store your new database in several files, uncheck this option. By default
this option is checked that value means that the database is stored in one file only.
Click the Next button to proceed to the Defining database files step of the wizard.
4.2.3 Defining database files

Specify the parameters of the database single and secondary files.
Note: this step is skipped if you checked the Single Database File option on previous
step.
Primary database file

First set the length of the primary file (the file set on the previous step) in the Primary
File Length field. This number shows when the new database file should be started.
To add a new database file set its name in the Secondary file name field, then set its
length (to indicate where next file should be started) or starting at value (if you haven't
set the previous file length) and click the Add button. The file is added to the file list.
Now you can add more files in the same way or remove files from the list, clicking Delete.

4.2.4 Viewing result SQL statement

View the result CREATE DATABASE statement issued for the new database creation. You
can alter the script manually, if necessary. For more information see Changing Metadata
window.

If the Register the database after creating option was checked, the Database
Registration Info dialog will appear.

4.3 Register Database wizard

Register Database Wizard allows you to register a single database.
To start the wizard, select the Database | Register Database... main menu item, or
use the Register Database button on the main toolbar. You can also use the
Shift+Alt+R shortcut for the same purpose.
· Setting connection parameters

· Registering DB on a new host
· Setting specific options
See also:


Database Properties
4.3.1 Setting connection parameters

Set the connection properties in the appropriate boxes: user name, password and role.
User name
User name for connecting to the database server.
Password
Password for connecting to the server.
Role
Specify the role that you adopt on connection to the database. You must have previously
been granted membership in the role to gain the privileges of that role.

Click the Next button to proceed to the Setting specific options step or to the Registering
DB on a new host step of the wizard, depending on whether the Database is located on
a new host has been selected or not.
4.3.2 Registering DB on a new host

Note: this step is skipped if you chose Database is located on a new host in the
beginning.
Set the connection properties in the corresponding boxes: protocol, host name, user
name, password and misc.
For more details see Register Host wizard SSH connection settings and Setting specific
options.

4.3.3 Setting specific options

This step of the wizard allows you to set the database registration options using the
corresponding tabs: General database options, Log settings.
Database name
Select the database name to register from the drop-down list.
Database Alias
Any database alias that is convenient for you (e.g. Customers or My Test Database). This
alias will be displayed in the DB Explorer window.
Charset
Specify an active character set to use for subsequent database attachments.
Get Default button chooses the default charset which was set on creation of database.
Test Connection button allows you to check whether you are connected to the database
at the moment.

The General tab:
Font charset
Specify the character set to be used to display data in the grid.
Refresh objects on connection

This option allows you to enable/disable refreshing objects on connection to the
database. It is highly recommended to uncheck this option if your database contains
many objects or if connection to the database is slow.

Autoconnect at startup
With this option set, connection to the registered database is established automatically at

application startup.
Edit aliases file (only Firebird)

Allows changing local Firebird server aliases file.
The Logs tab allows you to set log options for the database:
Enable log of metadata changes

Check this option if you wish to log metadata changes of your database in a file.
Log file
This field is enabled if the Enable log of metadata changes option is selected. Type in
or use the Save as button to specify the path to the *.sql file to store the metadata
logs.
Enable log of SQL Editor queries

Check this option if you wish to log your SQL Editor queries in a file.
Log file
This field is enabled if the Enable log of SQL Editor queries option is selected. Type in
or use the Save as button to specify the path to the *.sql file to store the logs of SQL
queries.
Click the Finish button when done to start working with the newly registered database
in SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird.

4.4 Database Registration Info

Use the Database Registration Info dialog to view and edit the registration properties
of the database.
To open the dialog, select the database or any of its objects in the DB Explorer tree, then
select the Database | Database Registration Info... main menu item, or right-click
the database alias in DB Explorer and use the Database Registration Info... context
menu item. You can also use the Database Registration Info... button on the main
toolbar.
Note: the Copy Alias from... menu allows you to select the alias of a previously
registered database and use it for the newly created/configured database.
· Editing connection properties

· Setting database options
· Setting display options
· Setting grid and data options
· Setting default directories
· Setting log options
· Find Option
See also:


Database Properties
4.4.1 Editing connection properties

The Connection section of the Database Registration Info dialog allows you to view
and/or edit the connection properties in the corresponding boxes: User name, Password,
Role, Database name, Database alias, Charset, Font charset.
Note that client charset should match the charset used in the database.
Press the Get Default button to obtain information on DB charset from the server.
For more details see Register Database wizard Setting specific options.
See also:
Setting common database options

Setting display options

Setting default directories
Setting log options
4.4.2 Setting common database options

The Options section of the Database Registration Info dialog allows you to set
various options for the database.
Customize common database options according to your needs. The detailed description is
given below.

Autoconnect at startup
Check this option to specify that SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird automatically
establishes connection to the registered database at application startup.
Disconnect automatically when disconnecting from host

When enabled, disconnecting from host will automatically disconnect you from the
database.

Always Capitalize database object names

If this option checked, SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird automatically capitalizes all
database object names. Recommended for working with InterBase 5.x.
Quote identifiers if they are reserved words

If this option is checked, then the quotation marks are added automatically to all the
identifiers, spelled as InterBase reserved words.
Support InterBase 6.0 features

If this option is checked, the InterBase 6.0/FireBird opportunities are supported, e.g.
database objects are modified with the help of new SQL commands, not by direct
modifying of DB system tables. If you have InterBase 5.x or earlier version installed,
uncheck this option.
Refresh objects on connection

This option allows to skip refreshing objects on connection to database is added. It is
highly recommended to uncheck this option if your database contains many objects or if
connection to the database is slow.
See also:
Editing connection properties
Setting log options
4.4.3 Setting system objects options

The System objects section of the Database Registration Info dialog allows you to
specify which objects will be displayed in the Database Explorer tree.

Show system tables

If this option is checked, systems tables will also be shown in DB Explorer tree.
Show system created domains

Enabled, the domain list in DB Explorer will also include system domains, i.e. the
domains, which names start with 'RDB$'.
Show system created triggers

If this option is checked, the trigger list in DB Explorer will also contain system triggers
created automatically by IB for the realization of 'CHECK VALUE...' restrictions.
Show system created generators

If this option is checked, the system generators (which names start with 'RDB$') will be
displayed within DB Explorer tree.
Allow editing of triggers for system tables and views

When this option is enabled, you may edit triggers for system tables and views.
See also:

Setting log options
4.4.4 Setting grid and data options

The Grid and Data options section of the Database Registration Info dialog allows
you to adjust the default grid mode settings.
Enable boolean fields support

If this option is checked, boolean fields are supported.
Set required fields in grid

If this option is checked, you have to set values for all the NOT NULL table fields.
Set calculated fields as read-only

If this option is checked, you calculated field values can't be edited.
Get default values for fields

If this option is checked, SQL Manager will automatically get the default field values from
the database server.
Get record count beforehand

If this option is checked, SQL Manager automatically calculates the number of records in
table or query. The according information is displayed in the status bar.

Trim Char Fields in Grids

If this option is checked, the final spaces in fields of the CHAR type are trimmed during
the editing process.
Auto Commit Transactions

If this option is checked, SQL Manager automatically commits transactions, otherwise
you have to do it manually.
Protected Edit (block record while editing)

If this option is checked, SQL Manager blocks the record you are editing so that other
users can't edit this record. This helps to avoid conflicts of collective access to the
database.
Data Options
Use shared connection for each data view within a database

Check this option to disable creation of the separated connection for each data view.
Using it is recommended if maximum allowed number of connections is too low.
Use SQL sorting in data view

You can define sorting mode - it can be done by means of grid itself or by means of SQL.
Use SQL filter in data view

Defines filtering mode - it can be done by means of grid itself or by means of SQL.
Load visible rows mode if records more than

Set this option to switch to Load visible rows mode when number of records in dataset
exceeds specified number.
String fields width (chars)

Using this option you can limit string fields width that may improve performance on large
datasets.
Default Grid Mode defines grid mode which will be used by default.
With the Load all rows option enabled, when loading data, all the records are loaded
into grid buffers. In this mode opening the tables with many records may take a very
long time. But in this case you have some advantages: e.g. in the filter drop-down list
the column headers are displayed with the values for quick filter; it is possible to open
several sublevels at the same time when viewing data in master-detail view, etc.
Because opening and other operations with an object consisting of many records takes
sufficient time the Load visible rows mode should be used instead. It can be set
individually for each table and is saved between sessions (can be set via grid context
menu).
· Load all rows

The grid loads all records from a dataset. This option increases the grid performance
by reloading only changed dataset records when updating. In this mode all features
(automatic sorting, filtering and summary calculations) are available.
· Load visible rows

The grid loads only a fixed number of dataset records into memory. This option
minimizes dataset loading time. The automatic sorting, filtering, summary
calculations are not supported in this mode.
See also:
Setting log options
4.4.5 Defining Events

This tab allows you to specify what alerters should be taken into account (which event
messages them should be displayed within Event monitor).
Add the strings of event messages (ones set in event alerters) with the help of the Add
and Remove buttons of the dialog. Check the Registered option to register the event
in Event monitor.

4.4.6 Setting default directories

The Directories section of the Database Registration Info dialog allows you to set the
directories to be used by default for database extract, data export, data import, saving
HTML reports, creating reports operations.

See also:
Setting log options
4.4.7 Setting log options

The Logs section of the Database Registration Info dialog allows you to specify log
file names for metadata changes logging and SQL query logging, if necessary.
Logging can be useful when you are going to move the changes made in the
development database to the production database.
Enable log of metadata changes

Check this option if you wish to log metadata changes of your database in a file.
Metadata log file

This field is enabled if the Enable log of metadata changes option is selected. Type in
or use the Save as button to specify the path to the *.sql file to store the metadata
logs.

Enable log of SQL Editor queries

Check this option if you wish to log your SQL Editor queries in a file.
SQL Editor log file

This field is enabled if the Enable log of SQL Editor queries option is selected. Type in
or use the Save as button to specify the path to the *.sql file to store the logs of SQL
queries.
QuickSave options
Allows to sat up quick saving for database objects - automatic saving objects DDL and
location of quicksaving cache.
For more details see Quick save/Quick load.
See also:

4.5 Host Registration Info

You can obtain the information on a registered host via the Host Registration Info
dialog. Also you can set
a number of options for the host.
The dialog can be called by using the Host Registration Info item from the DB explorer
popup menu, or using the Database | Host Registration Info... main menu item.
· Connection properties
· Host options
· SSH tunneling
· Find Option
4.5.1 Connection properties

This tab aloows you to set the connection properties in the corresponding boxes.

· Select network protocol and port/service.

· Select or type in server name.
· Enter authorization information: user name and password for target database.
User name
User name for connecting to the database server.
Password
Password for connecting to the server.
Database name
Select the database name to register from the drop-down list.
Role
Specify the role that you adopt on connection to the database. You must have previously
been granted membership in the role to gain the privileges of that role.
Authorized InterBase/Firebird users are stored in a security database. Each

InterBase/Firebird has its own security database, which means that a user definition is
bound to the server where it is stored. The security database also stores an encrypted
password for each user.
Client library provides the conduit between the API or object library an application uses
to communicate with DB server and the networking protocols used to exchange data with
the network.
See also:

4.5.2 Host options

Specify the location of client library and server security database; set some specific
options for registered host.
Click Finish button when done to start working with the selected host in SQL Manager

Autoconnect on startup
Check the option to set the automatic connection to the host on startup.
Connect to the host automatically when connecting to any its database.

When checked, automatically connects to the host when trying to connect to any of its
databases.
Don't show client library warnings

Turn this option on to skip the message of client library version incompatibility.
See also:
4.5.3 SSH tunneling

Set the connection properties in the respective boxes: protocol, host name, user name,
password and misc.
Connect through the Secure SHell (SSH) tunnel

Turning this option on allows you to connect to hosts over a Secure Shell Tunnel. The
traffic is encrypted to protect individual and corporate data. You must also specify SSH
port, SSH user name and SSH password. Use the appropriate boxes on this tab. To
obtain more information see SSH connection settings.
Due to the SSH Private Key authentication being implemented you may set the Use
Private Key for authentication.

Note that SSH tunneling is only available when you use TCP/IP protocol.
See also:

4.6 Database Properties

A number of database-level options that determine the characteristics of the database
can be set for each database. These options are unique to each database and do not
affect other databases.
The dialog can be called by using the Database Properties... item from the DB explorer
popup menu, or using the Database | Database Properties... main menu item.
· General
· Active users
· Description
· Find Option
See also:

4.6.1 General
The General section of the Database Properties dialog allows you to view/edit the
database summary: TPage size, Allocated DB pages, SQL dialect used, Sweep interval,
On-Disc-Structure version.
Page Size
Database page size in bytes.
Allocated DB pages
Number of pages in database.
SQL Dialect
SQL dialect version used.
Sweep Interval
Number of transactions, after executing which automatic garbage collection is carried
out.
ODS Version
Database on-disc structure version.
Forced Writes

Enables mode of forced writing data on disk.
Read Only
Makes the database available read-only.
4.6.2 Active users

The Active users section of the Database Properties dialog displays the list of active
users which are currently active.
4.6.3 Description
The Database Description section of the Database Properties dialog allows you to
set/view the optional database description available for editing.


Part
V
5 Database objects management

SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird provides powerful tools to manage database
objects.
To obtain detailed information concerning InterBase/Firebird database objects, refer to

the official documentation.
Note: before working with database objects in SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird
you should connect to the database first.
Creating Database Objects
To create a database object:

· select the Database | New Object... main menu item;
· select the type of object within the New Object Dialog;
· follow the steps of the wizard which guides you through the entire process of creating
the object, or set the object properties using its editor - depending on the selected
object type.
Note that you can also create a database object by selecting the appropriate context
menu item of the DB Explorer tree or using the Ctrl+N shortcut.
Dropping Database Objects
To drop a database object:

· select the database object in the DB Explorer tree;
· right-click the object to call its context menu and select the Drop <object type>
<object name> context menu item;
· confirm dropping in the dialog window.
Editing Database Objects
To edit a database object:

· select the database object in the DB Explorer tree;
· right-click the object to call its context menu and select the Edit <object type>
<object name> context menu item, or double-click the object to open it in its
editor.
When using an object editor, you can benefit from tabs. To switch between tabs, click on
their respective tabs at the top of the main window. You can do it at anytime since views
are absolutely independent.
See also:
Getting started
Database Explorer

Database management
Data management
Import/Export tools
Database tools
Server tools
Personalization
External tools

5.1 New Object

The Create New Object dialog allows you to select the type of the object to be created
and run the appropriate wizard or editor.
To open the dialog, select the Database | New Object... main menu item.
Using the Database drop-down list to select the alias of the database where the new
object should be created. Pick an object type icon and click OK to invoke the
corresponding wizard or dialog.
See also:
Duplicate Object Wizard

5.2 Duplicate Object Wizard

Use the Duplicate Object Wizard to create a new database object of the same type and
having the same properties as one of the existing ones.
To run the wizard, select the Database | Duplicate Object... main menu item, or
right-click an object of the desired type in the DB Explorer tree and use the Duplicate
<object type> <object name>... context menu item.
· Selecting the source database
· Selecting object to duplicate
· Selecting destination database
· Modifying the new object's definition
· Using templates
See also:
New Object dialog
5.2.1 Selecting the source database

This step of the wizard allows you to select the source database containing the source
object to be duplicated.

Click the Next button to proceed to the Selecting object to duplicate step of the wizard.
5.2.2 Selecting object to duplicate

Use the Objects drop-down menu to select the type of the object you intend to
duplicate.
Select a database object to copy its properties to the new object.
Click the Next button to proceed to the Selecting destination database step of the
wizard.
5.2.3 Selecting destination database

Select the target database and schema to create the new object in, set the name of
the new database object.
Table options

Check the Copy data option to copy data from the source table to the new one.
Deactivate triggers while data copying

Disables object triggers firing while copying data.
Copy privileges
Defines whether the privileges on the object should be copied as well (displaying the
option depends on the object type).
5.2.3.1 Specifying object details
Note: displaying the step depends on the type of object to be duplicated. It allows to
specify whether the source object details should be duplicated in the target object.

5.2.4 Modifying the new object's definition

This step of the wizard allows you to browse the result SQL statement.
If necessary, you can edit the definition of the new object.

Click the Finish button to start the process.

5.3 Domains
A domain is a column definition template, global to the database, upon which actual
column definitions in tables may be based.
If there are columns in the database table or in several database tables, having the same
properties, it is useful to describe such column type and its behavior as a domain, and
then correspond each of these columns to this domain.
Create domain
To create a new domain:
· Select the Database | New Object menu item.

· Select Domain in the New Object window.
· Edit domain properties and fields on the appropriate tabs of the Domain Editor.
Hint: To create new domain you can also right-click the Domains node of the
explorer tree and select the New domain... item from the popup menu.
To create a new domain with the same properties as one of the existing tables has:
· Select the Database | Duplicate Object menu item.

· Follow the instructions of the Duplicate Object Wizard.
The Duplicate Object window allows you to select the database to create the new domain
in and to edit the result SQL statement for creating the domain.
Edit domain
To edit the existing domain:
· Select the domain for editing in the explorer tree (type the first letters of the
domain name for quick search).
· Right-click and select the Edit domain <Domain_Name> item in the popup
menu or simply double-click the domain.
· Edit domain subobjects and data on the appropriate tabs of the Domain Editor.
To change the name of the domain:
· Select the domain for editing in the explorer tree.

· Right-click and select the Rename domain <Domain_Name> item from the
popup menu.
· Edit domain name in the dialog window.
Drop domain
To drop a domain:
· Select the domain for editing in the explorer tree.

· Right-click and select the Drop domain <Domain_Name> item from the popup
menu.

· Confirm dropping in the dialog window.
5.3.1 Domain Editor

Domain Editor allows you to edit properties of the domains. Domain Editor can be
open automatically after the domain is created and is available on editing the domain
(see Create domain and Edit domain for details).
To open a domain in the Domain Editor, just double-click it in the Explorer Tree.
· Using navigation bar

· Editing domain definition

· Editing domain check

· Browsing object dependencies
· Editing object description
· Viewing DDL definition
Availability:
Windows Professional Yes
Windows Lite Yes
5.3.1.1 Using navigation bar
The navigation bar on the left allows you to:
Object bar:
· Select a database and a domain for editing within the current window.
General bar:
· Show SQL Manager help system
· Compile the current domain definition
· Print metadata of the current operator
· View Dependency Tree for the domain
· Perform quicksave/quickload
· Refresh the content of the active tab
· Bring the window to its default size.

5.3.1.2 Editing domain definition
The basic domain parameters - name and type are set on the Domain tab.
See also:
Domain Editor

5.3.1.3 Editing domain check
On this Check tab you can set CHECK constraints, i.e. conditions that must be true for
inserts and updates to the field, based on the current domain, e.g. VALUE>=10. The
CHECK constraint cannot reference any domain or column.
See also:
Domain Editor


5.4 Tables
Relational databases store all their data in tables. A table is a data structure consisting of
an unordered set of horizontal rows, each containing the same number of vertical
columns. The intersection of an individual row and column is a field that contains a
specific piece of information. Much of the power of relational databases comes from
defining the relations among the tables.
Create table
To create a new table:
· Select the Database | New Object menu item.

· Select Table in the New Object window.
· Edit table properties and fields on the appropriate tabs of the New Table window.
Hint: To create new table you can also right-click the Tables node of the explorer
tree and select the New Table... item from the popup menu.
To create a new table with the same properties as one of the existing tables has:
· Select the Database | Duplicate Object menu item.

The Duplicate Object window allows you to select the database to create the new table in
and to edit the result SQL statement for creating the table.
Edit table
To edit the existing table (manage its fields, indices, data, etc):
· Select the table for editing in the explorer tree (type the first letters of the table
name for quick search).
· Right-click and select the Edit Table <Table_Name> item in the popup menu or
simply double-click the table.
· Edit table subobjects and data on the appropriate tabs of the Table Editor.
To change the name of the table:
· Select the table for editing in the explorer tree.

· Right-click and select the Rename Table <Table_Name> item from the popup
menu.
· Edit table name in the dialog window.
Drop table
To drop a table:
· Select the table for editing in the explorer tree.

· Right-click and select the Drop Table <Table_Name> item from the popup
menu.

5.4.1 New Table

New Table window allows you to create new table, set table properties, specify table
fields and edit table description.
New Table window can be open automatically after the table is created. (see Create
Table for details).


· Setting table properties
· Specifying table fields
See also:
Table Editor
Field Editor
Object bar:
· Select a database for creating table.
General bar:
· Compile the current table definition.
· Bring the window to its actual size.

5.4.1.2 Setting table properties
The Table tab is provided for setting table name and its description.
Table name
Name of the table; must be unique among table and procedure names in the database. It
is available only when creating the table.
Description
This field contains any optional description on the table.
See also:
Table Editor
Field Editor

5.4.1.3 Specifying fields
The Fields tab is intended for specifying table fields. Double-click a field to open the
Field Editor for editing the field. A right-click displays the popup menu, allowing you to
create new, edit or drop the selected field. Using this menu you can also change the field
order or create a copy of the field.
Column
Name for the table column; must be unique among column names in the table.
See Field Editor for getting information on creating a table field.

See also:
Table Editor
Field Editor
5.4.2 Table Editor

Table Editor is the basic SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird tool for working with
tables. It allows you to create, edit and drop table's fields, indices, foreign keys, and
other table subobjects, manage table data, and much more.
To open a table in the Table Editor, just double-click it in the Explorer Tree (see Edit
Table for details).

· Managing table fields
· Changing fields order
· Managing primary keys
· Managing table foreign keys
· Managing table checks
· Managing table indices
· Managing unique keys
· Managing table triggers
· Viewing table data


· Setting object permissions

See also:
New Table
Field Editor
Index Editor
Editing table constraints
Availability:
Windows Lite Yes

Object bar:
· Select a database and a table for editing within the current window.
General bar:
· Print table metadata
· Refresh the content of the active Table Editor tab
· Bring the window to its default size
· Set grants on the table
· Alter Table Editor options.
Tools bar:
· View Dependency Tree for the table.
· Create the view from the table
· Create the procedure for the table
The next bar displays various actions according to the current page of Table Editor.
The Explorer bar displays table subobjects in a form of a tree. You can edit a table
subobject by double-clicking it.

5.4.2.2 Managing fields
The Fields tab is intended for managing table fields. Double-click a field to open the
Field Editor for editing the field. A right-click displays the popup menu, allowing you to
create new, edit or drop the selected field. Using this menu you can also change the field
order or create a copy of the field.
See also:
Table Editor
Field Editor

5.4.2.3 Changing fields order
You can change the fields order in the Reorder Fields dialog. The order can be changed
both by using of the corresponding buttons, and by drag-and-drop operations in the field
list. Click the OK button to apply changes.
See also:
Table Editor
Field Editor

5.4.2.4 Editing table constraints
Use Constraint Editor to create or edit a table constraint. To add a constraint to the
table or to edit a table constraint open the table in the Table Editor, open the
Constraints tab. The table constraints can be of the following types: Primary key,
Foreign key, Check or Unique. Create them on the appropriate tabs of the editor.
· Managing primary keys

· Managing foreign keys
· Managing table checks
· Managing unique keys

5.4.2.4.1 Using navigation bar
General bar:
· Refresh the content of the active Primary Key tab
· Manage Grants on the table
· Print metadata of the current table
· Set Table Editor options
The next bar displays various actions according to the current page of Primary Key
Editor.

5.4.2.4.2 Managing primary keys
Table primary keys are managed on the Primary Keys tab of the Table Editor.
Add Primary Key
To add a primary key to the table:
· Open the table in the Table Editor.

· Open the Constaraints tab then choose the Primary Keys tab.
· Right-click and select the New Primary Key... item from the popup menu.
· Edit primary key properties within the Primary Key Editor dialog.
Edit Primary Key
To edit primary key:


· Right-click the primary key and select the Edit Primary Key item from the popup
menu or simply double-click the key to edit.
· Edit primary key properties within the Primary Key Editor Dialog.
Drop Primary Key
To drop the primary key:

· Right-click the key to drop and select the Drop Primary Key item from the popup
menu.

5.4.2.4.2.1 Primary Key Editor
The Primary Key Editor allows you to edit the primary keys. It opens when you create a
new primary key or edit the existing one (see Create Primary Key and Edit Primary Key
for details).
· Editing primary key definition

See also:
Table Editor
Index Editor
Trigger Editor
Availability:
Windows Lite Yes
Key Name
Name of a constraint; the constraint name must be unique within the table.

Fields for key

To include fields to the key, move the fields from the Available Fields list to the Included
fields by double-clicking or dragging them. To remove the fields from the key, move
them back in the same way. You can also use buttons >, < to move the selected fields
(multiple fields are selected by Ctrl or Shift).
See also:
Primary Key Editor
5.4.2.4.3 Managing foreign keys
Table foreign keys are managed on the Foreign Keys tab of the Table Editor.
Add Foreign Key
To add a foreign key to the table:

· Open the Constaraints tab then choose the Foreign Keys tab.
· Right-click and select the Add Foreign Key... item from the popup menu.
· Edit foreign key properties within the Foreign Key Editor dialog.

Edit Foreign Key
To edit foreign key:

· Right-click the foreign key and select the Edit Foreign Key item from the popup menu
or simply double-click the key to edit.
· Edit foreign key properties within the Foreign Key Editor Dialog.
Drop Foreign Key
To drop the foreign key:

· Right-click the key to drop and select the Drop Foreign Key item from the popup
menu.

5.4.2.4.3.1 Foreign Key Editor
The Foreign Key Editor allows you to edit the index fields and other index properties. It
opens when you create a new index or edit the existing one (see Create Foreign Key and
Edit Foreign Key for details).
· Editing foreign key definition

See also:
Table Editor
Index Editor
Trigger Editor
Availability:


Windows Lite Yes
Foreign Key Editor allows you to select fields for the foreign key, when you add or edit
a foreign key to the table with the Table Editor.
Foreign Key Name

Foreign Table
Select the foreign table for the key from the drop-down list of the database tables.
Available Fields / Included Fields

The upper Available Fields list contains the current table fields, and the upper
Included Fields list contain the fields, included in the key. Two lower lists contain the
fields of the selected foreign table and the fields of this table, which are included in the
key. Move the fields from between the lists in the same way as it is described for
primary/unique keys (see above).
On Delete Rule / On Update Rule

Set rules to change a foreign key whenever the referenced primary key changes.
The following values are available:

· NO ACTION (default): Does not change the foreign key; may cause the primary key
update to fail due to referential integrity checks;
· CASCADE: For ON DELETE, deletes the corresponding foreign key; for ON UPDATE,
updates the corresponding foreign key to the new value of the primary key;
· SET NULL: Sets all the columns of the corresponding foreign key to NULL;
· SET DEFAULT: Sets every column of the corresponding foreign key is set to its default
value in effect when the referential integrity constraint is defined; when the default for
a foreign column changes after the referential integrity constraint is defined, the
change does not have an effect on the default value used in the referential integrity
constraint;
See also:
Foreign Key Editor

5.4.2.4.4 Managing checks
Check specifies an expression producing a Boolean result which new or updated rows
must satisfy for an insert or update operation to succeed. Expressions evaluating to TRUE
or UNKNOWN succeed. Should any row of an insert or update operation produce a FALSE
result an error exception is raised and the insert or update does not alter the database. A
check constraint specified as a column constraint should reference that column's value
only, while an expression appearing in a table constraint may reference multiple
columns.
Table checks are managed on the Checks tab of the Table Editor.
Add Check
To add a check to the table:

· Open the Constaraints tab then choose the Checks tab.
· Right-click and select the Add Check... item from the popup menu.
· Edit check properties within the Check Editor dialog.
Edit Check
To edit check:


· Right-click the check and select the Edit Check item from the popup menu or simply
double-click the key to edit.
· Edit check properties within the Check Editor Dialog.
Drop Check
To drop the check:

· Right-click the key to drop and select the Drop Check item from the popup menu.

5.4.2.4.4.1 Check Editor
The Check Editor allows you to edit check properties. It opens when you create a new
check or edit the existing one (see Create Check and Edit Check for details).
· Editing check definition

See also:
Table Editor
Index Editor
Trigger Editor
Availability:
Windows Lite Yes
Check Constraint Name

Check Constraint Text

Set the conditions that each new value entered to the field must meet, e.g.
PERCENT_CHANGE BETWEEN -50 AND 50
When you are done, click OK. The Compile Window appears, where you can commit the
successful transaction, rollback transaction and return to the editor, or make some
changes in the statements, rollback and recompile new statements.
See also:
Check Editor
5.4.2.4.5 Managing unique keys
The Unique Key Editor allows you to edit unique key properties.
Add Unique Key
To add a unique key to the table:

· Open the Constaraints tab then choose Uniques tab.
· Right-click and select the Add Unique Key... item from the popup menu.
· Edit unique key properties within the Unique Key Editor dialog.

Edit Unique Key
To edit unique key:

· Right-click the unique key and select the Edit Unique Key item from the popup menu
or simply double-click the key to edit.
· Edit unique key properties within the Unique Key Editor Dialog.
Drop Unique Key
To drop the unique key:

· Right-click the key to drop and select the Drop Unique Key item from the popup
menu.

5.4.2.4.5.1 Uniques Editor
The Index Editor allows you to edit the index fields and other index properties. It opens
when you create a new index or edit the existing one (see Create Unique Key and Edit
Unique Key for details).
· Editing unique key definition

See also:
Table Editor
Index Editor
Trigger Editor

Availability:
Windows Lite Yes
Unique Key Editor allows you to select fields for the unique key, when you add or edit a
unique key to the table with the Table Editor.
Enter a name for the new key and then select a table field to include in the key from the
Table fields group.
To include fields to the key, move the fields from the Available Fields list to the
Included Fields by double-clicking or dragging them, both in the Table fields group
and in the Unique table fields group. To remove the fields from the key, move them
back in the same way. You can also use the arrow buttons to move the selected fields
(multiple fields are selected by Ctrl or Shift).
See also:
Uniques Editor
5.4.2.5 Managing indices
The Indices tab is provided for managing table indices. Double-click an index to open
the Index Editor for editing the index. A right-click displays the popup menu, allowing
you to create new, edit, drop the selected index or recompute it with the help of the

corresponding context menu item.
Note that for every index you can also set an optional description in the corresponding
editor below.
See Indices for details.
5.4.2.6 Managing triggers
The Triggers tab is provided for managing table triggers. Double-click a trigger to open
the Trigger Editor for editing the trigger. A right-click displays the popup menu, allowing
you to create new, edit, drop the selected trigger or set it inactive by selecting the
corresponding context menu item.
Note that for every trigger you can also set an optional description in the corresponding
editor below.
See Triggers for details.

5.4.3 Fields
Table fields are managed on the Fields tab of the Table Editor.
Add Field
To add a field to the table:

· Open the Fields tab.
· Right-click and select the New Field item from the popup menu
· Edit field properties within the Fields Editor Dialog
Edit Field
To edit the table field:

· Right-click the field and select the Edit Field item from the popup menu or simply double-click the
field to edit
· Edit field properties within the Fields Editor Dialog
To change the order of the table fields:
Open the table in the Table Editor.

Open the Fields tab.

Right-click and select the Reorder Fields... item from the popup menu.
Edit field order within Re-order Columns window for changing the field order.
Drop Field
To drop the table field:

· Right-click on the field to drop and select the Drop Field item from the popup menu.
· Confirm dropping in the dialog window

5.4.3.1 Field Editor
Field Editor Dialog allows you to edit the properties of the table fields.
· Setting field name and type

· Setting field defaults
· Defining array
· Defining autoincrement
See also:
Table Editor
Domain Editor
Availability:
Windows Lite Yes

5.4.3.1.1 Setting field name and type
Use the Column name edit box to set the field name. Note that the name of the field
must be unique among all the field names in the table.
Field based on
Select the source type for creating the field. It can be one of the existing domains, a
standard data type, e.g. INTEGER, DATE or CHAR, or a 'COMPUTED BY' expression if you
want to calculate the field value using other fields' values.
Field based on Description

Domain Makes the field based on the existing domain. Select the domain
name from the Domain drop-down list on the Domain tab. You
can also create a new domain, using the New domain button,
or edit the selected domain with the Edit domain button (see
Domain Editor to learn how to create/edit domains).
Standard data type Makes the field based on the standard SQL datatype. Select the
data type from the Type drop-down list on the Raw Data Type
tab. For NUMERIC and DECIMAL data types set 1 - 15 digit
precision and scale in the appropriate boxes; for CHAR and
VARCHAR set length (in characters) and charset, for BLOB data
type set segment size, subtype and charset.
'COMPUTED BY' Specifies that the value of the field's data is calculated from
expression expression at runtime and is therefore not allocated storage
space in the database. Set the expression to calculate on the
Calculated by tab, e.g.:
(OLD_SALARY + OLD_SALARY * PERCENT_CHANGE / 100)
Note the following:

· the expression can be any arithmetic expression valid for
the datatypes in the expression;
· any columns referenced in the expression must exist
before they can be used in expression;
· the expression cannot reference Blob columns;
· the expression must return a single value, and cannot
return an array.
Not Null
Check this option to prevent the entry of NULL or unknown values in column. Not null
affects all INSERT and UPDATE operations on a column.
Primary Key
Check this option to include the field into the primary key. Note that if you include a field
to a primary key, you should also make it Not Null to avoid an error.
Support IB6/FireBird syntax

Check this option to enable support of InterBase 6.0 / FireBird syntax. Default checked.

See also:
Field Editor
5.4.3.1.2 Setting field defaults
The Default tab allows you to define the default value for the column. You can either
select the default object from the database defaults or define the default value for the
column.
Specify a default field value that is entered when no other entry is made.
Possible values are:
· literal: Inserts a specified string, numeric value, or date value;
· NULL: Enters a NULL value;
· USER: Enters the user name of the current user.
See also:
Field Editor

5.4.3.1.3 Defining array
On the Array tab you can set array parameters.
The field can be an array of one of standard data types (except BLOB). To create an
array, select the data type and then open the Array tab of the dialog. To add a
dimension to an array, click the Add Dimension button, then set its bounds at the boxes
above the dimension list. To delete a dimension, select one and click the Delete
Dimension button.
See also:
Field Editor

5.4.3.1.4 Defining autoincrement
The Autoincrement tab allows you to create a generator, a trigger or a procedure

wrapper along with the field to simulate an autoincrement field.
See also:
Field Editor

To create a generator open the Generator subtab, check the Create Generator option, then set
the generator name and the initial value.

To create a trigger open the Trigger subtab, check the Create Trigger subtab and edit the SQL
statement for creating a trigger.

Procedure wrapper returns new generator value and can be used instead of GEN_ID for a
specific generator.

5.4.3.1.5 Setting field checks
You can specify field checks on this tab.
An attempt to enter a new value in the column fails if the value does not meet the
condition set on this tab, e.g.
MIN_SALARY < MAX_SALARY.
See also:
Field Editor

5.4.4 Indices
Table indices are managed on the Indices tab of the Table Editor.
Create Index
To add an index to the table:

· Open the Indices tab.
· Right-click and select the New Index item from the popup menu.
· Edit the index properties within the Index Editor.
Edit Index
To edit the table index:

· Right-click the index and select the Edit Index <Index_Name> or simply
double-click the index to edit.
· Edit the index properties within the Index Editor.

Drop Index
To drop the table index:

· Right-click on the index to drop and select the Drop Index item from the popup menu.
5.4.4.1 Index Editor
The Index Editor allows you to edit the index fields and other index properties. It opens
when you create a new index or edit the existing one (see Create Index and Edit Index
for details).

· Editing index definition

· Editing index fields
See also:
Table Editor
Availability:
Windows Lite Yes
5.4.4.1.1 Editing index properties
Use Index Editor to create or edit a table index. To add an index to the table or to edit a
table index open the table in the Table Editor, open the Indices tab, right-click and
select the New Index item or the Edit Index <INDEX_NAME> item from the popup
menu accordingly.
Index Name
The unique name for the index.
Order

Select the ascending/descending sorting order for columns in index.
Index Active
This option is available only on editing an index. It makes the index active or inactive
respectively.
See also:
Index Editor
5.4.4.1.2 Editing index fields
Fields for index

To include fields in the index, move the fields from the Available Fields list to the
Selected fields by double-clicking or dragging them. To remove the fields from the
index, move them back in the same way. You can also use the arrow buttons to move the
selected fields (multiple fields are selected by Ctrl or Shift).
Unique
Check this option to prevent insertion or updating of duplicate values into indexed
columns.

See also:
Index Editor
5.4.5 Creating table view

The simpliest way to create the view from the table is to choose the Create view item
from the Tools bar.
See also:
View Editor


5.5 Views
Views are useful for allowing users to access a set of relations (tables) as if it were a
single table, and limiting their access to just that. Views can also be used to restrict
access to rows (a subset of a particular table).
Create view
To create a new view:
· Select the Database | New Object... menu item.

· Select View in the New Object dialog.
· Edit view definition within the View Editor.
Hint: To create new view you can also right-click the Views node of the explorer tree
and select the New View... item from the popup menu. Or you can click the Create
View button on the toolbar of Table Editor.
Another way to create a view is building a query in the Visual Query Builder tool (click
the Create View button on the toolbar after finishing building).
To create a new view with the same properties as one of the existing views has:
· Select the Database | Duplicate Object... menu item.

Edit view
To edit the existing view (manage its fields, indices, data, etc):
· Select the view for editing in the explorer tree (type the first letters of the view name
for quick search).
· Right-click and select the Edit View <View_Name> item from the popup menu or
simply double-click the view.
· Edit view definition and data on the appropriate tabs of the View Editor.
To change the name of the view:
· Select the view to rename in the explorer tree.

· Right-click and select the Rename View <View_Name> item from the popup menu.
· Edit view name in the dialog window.
Drop view
To drop a view:
· Select the view to drop in the explorer tree.

· Right-click and select the Drop View <View_Name> item from the popup menu.

5.5.1 View Editor

The View Editor allows you to create new view and edit the existing view definition
(view name and the SELECT statement it implements). It opens when you create a new
view or edit the existing one (see Create View and Edit View for details).
Another way to create the view from new-created table is to choose the Create view
item from the Tools bar.
To open a view in the View Editor, double-click it in the Explorer Tree.

· Editing view definition
· Viewing fields
· Managing triggers
· Viewing data

· Viewing query plan

· Viewing perfomance analysis
See also:
Table Editor
Trigger Editor
Availability:
Windows Lite Yes
The navigation bar at the left allows you to:
Object bar:
Select a database and a view for editing within the current window.
General bar:
· Compile the current view
· Managing grants and autogrants


· Print metadata of the current view
· Refresh the current tab content
· View the dependecy tree for the current object
View bar:
Open current view with Query Builder.
The next bar displays various actions according to the current page of View Editor.
5.5.1.2 Editing view definition
The View Editor represents the view definition as SQL statement, so it is enough to
simply edit the whole definition in the editor area to make changes, and click the
Compile item on the navigation bar to apply it to the view on the server.
Another way to create a view is building a query in the Query Builder tool.
Note: when you change the query, the header of the view is also changed automatically.
All the changes you made are processed by the View Editor precompiler and the list of

the fields is formed on the corresponding tab of the editor.
After processing the view definition by precompiler the results are displayed at the
bottom of View Editor.
See also:
View Editor
5.5.1.3 Viewing fields
The Fields tab is provided for viewing fields represented in the view.
A right-click displays the popup menu, allowing you to rename view fields.
See also:
View Editor

5.5.1.4 Managing triggers
The Triggers tab is provided for managing table triggers. Double-click a trigger to open
the Trigger Editor for editing the trigger. A right-click displays the popup menu, allowing
you to create new, edit, or drop the selected trigger.
See Triggers for details.
See also:
View Editor
5.5.1.5 Viewing data
The Data tab displays the view data as a grid (see Data View for details). The popup
menu of this tab and the Data Management navigation bar allow you to export, import
data. Exporting data as SQL Script is also available.

See also:
View Editor
5.5.1.6 Viewing query plan
On this tab you can see the plan of the query on which the current view is based on.
See also:
View Editor

5.5.1.7 Viewing perfomance analysis
This tab displays the perfomance analysis for the query on which the current view is
based.
See also:
View Editor


5.6 Triggers
The triggers are managed on the Triggers tab of the Table Editor.
Create Trigger
To add a trigger to the table:

· Open the Triggers tab.
· Right-click and select the New Trigger item from the popup menu.
· Edit the trigger properties within the Trigger Editor.
Edit Trigger
To edit the trigger:

· Right-click the trigger and select the Edit Trigger <Trigger_Name> or simply
double-click the trigger to edit.
· Edit the trigger properties within the Trigger Editor.
Drop Trigger
To drop the trigger:

· Right-click on the trigger to drop and select the Drop Trigger item from the popup
menu.

5.6.1 Trigger Editor

The Trigger Editor allows you to define the trigger. It opens when you create a new
trigger or edit the existing one (see Create Trigger and Edit Trigger for details).
· Editing trigger definition

· Editing trigger message
· Viewing object operations
See also:
Table Editor
View Editor

Availability:
Windows Lite Yes
Object bar:
· Select a database and a trigger for editing within the current window.
General bar:
· Compile the current trigger definition
· Set autogrant privilegies for the trigger
· Debug current trigger
· Perform quicksave for the current trigger
· Perform quickload for the current trigger
The next bar displays various actions according to the current page of Trigger Editor.

5.6.1.2 Editing trigger definition
The main trigger parameters are set on the Trigger tab.
Name
Name of the trigger; it must be unique to the database.
Type
Conditions of the trigger firing, i.e. table operation for firing (Insert, Update or Delete)
and the firing time (before or after the operation is performed).
For Table
Table or view name, the trigger is created for.
Position
Defines the order of firing triggers on the same event. It must be an integer between 0
and 32.767, inclusive. Lower-number triggers fire first, thus trigger with the default
position (0) will be the first trigger to fire. Note that triggers for a table need not be
consecutive; the same action triggers with the same position number will fire in random
order.
The trigger body consists of an optional list of local variables and their data types and a
block of statements in InterBase procedure and trigger language, bracketed by BEGIN
and END. These statements are performed when the trigger fires.

The Parameter Editor window allows you to define parameter type. Note that creating
parameters based on a domain can is only available for Firebird 2.0 and later.
See also:
Trigger Editor

5.6.1.3 Editing trigger messages
On the Messages tab you can add and edit the appropriate trigger messages.
All operations with trigger messages (appending, deleting, etc.) can be performed
whether with the help of the Messages bar or by selecting the corresponding item of tab
context menu.
See also:
Trigger Editor

5.7 Procedures
A stored procedure is a self-contained program written in InterBase procedure and
trigger language, and stored as part of a database's metadata. Stored procedures can be
invoked directly from applications, or can be substituted for a table or view in a SELECT
statement. Stored procedures can receive input parameters from and return values to
applications and can execute on the server.
Creating Procedure
To create a new procedure:

· Select Procedure in the New Object dialog.
· Edit procedure within the Procedure Editor.
Hint: To create new procedure you can also right-click the Procedures node of the
explorer tree and select New Procedure... item from the popup menu.
To create a new procedure with the same properties as one of the existing procedures
has:

Editing Procedure
To edit an existing procedure:
· Select the procedure for editing in the explorer tree (type the first letters of the
procedure name for quick search)
· Right-click and select the Edit Procedure item from the popup menu or simply
double-click the procedure.
· Edit procedure definition in the editor area of the Procedure Editor.
To change the name of a Procedure:
· Select the procedure to rename in the explorer tree.

· Right-click and select the Rename Procedure item from the popup menu.
· Edit procedure name in the dialog window.
Executing Procedure
To execute a procedure:
· Select the procedure in the explorer tree (type the first letters of the procedure name
for quick search).
· Right-click and select Edit Procedure item from the popup menu or simply
double-click the procedure.
· Execute procedure by clicking on the Execute Procedure item in the Procedure Editor.

Dropping Procedure
To drop a Procedure:
· Select the procedure to drop in the explorer tree.

· Right-click and select the Drop Procedure item from the popup menu.

5.7.1 Procedure Editor

The Procedure Editor allows you to create new procedure, execute the existing
procedure or edit its definition. It opens when you create a new procedure or edit the
existing one (see Create Procedure and Edit Procedure for details).

· Editing procedure definition
· Executing procedure
· Viewing perfomance analysis
· Viewing object operations
See also:
Stored Procedure Debugger

Availability:
Windows Lite Yes
The navigation bar at the left allows you to:
Object bar:
Select a database and a procedure for editing within the current window.
General bar:
· Compile the current procedure

· Execute the current procedure
· Debug the current procedure


· Print metadata of the current procedure
· View Dependency Tree for the procedure
Input Parameters bar allows you managing stored procedure input parameters.
The next bar displays various actions according to the current page of Procedure Editor.

5.7.1.2 Editing procedure definition
The Stored Procedure tab allows you to view and edit the definition for the stored
procedure.
See also:
Procedure Editor
5.7.1.3 Browsing procedure parameters
Parameters

This page contains the input and the output parameters, used by the procedure. For each
parameter its name, data type and parameter type (Input or Output) are displayed. In
the bottom of the window you can view and edit the description of the selected
parameter. Using the Export Metadata function of the popup menu, you can also export
the parameter list to file.
To append/insert/remove a parameter please use the corresponding context menu items.
The Parameter Editor window allows you to define parameter type. Note that creating
parameters based on a domain can is only available for Firebird 2.0 and later.

See also:
Procedure Editor
5.7.1.4 Executing procedure
Procedure Editor provides an ability to execute current procedure. Click the Execute
item of the navigation bar to execute the procedure. The result of the successfully
executed procedure, as well as the error message in case of execution failure, appears in
the message panel at the bottom of the Procedure Editor.
See also:
Procedure Editor
5.7.1.5 Viewing perfomance analysis
This tab displays the perfomance analysis for the query on which the current procedure is
based.
See also:
Procedure Editor

5.7.2 Procedure/Trgger Debugger

To fix the errors in the procedure code and to optimize the procedure work you can
debug the procedure step-by-step before compilation, using the Stored Procedure
Debugger. To activate the debugger open the procedure in the Procedure Editor, then
click the Debug Procedure button on the toolbar.
At the top area you can view and edit the procedure text. The blue spots at the left of the
window indicate the statements, executed by the procedure; the green arrow indicates
the current statement.
To start executing the procedure step-by-step press F8. To reset executing the procedure
press Ctrl+F2. To add a breakpoint to the current statement press Ctrl+F8. You can trace
into a procedure, which is called from the current procedure by pressing the Trace Into
button. Also you can run the current procedure until return to the up-level procedure by
pressing the Run Until Return button.
Stored Procedure Debugger Tabs
Parameters and Variables

Displays the list of input and output procedure parameters (indicated by the proper icon)
with their values and types.
Results
Displays the list of RETURNS variables. After executing the procedure it also displays
their values.
Last Statement
Displays the last executed statement, the statement execution plan and the execution
time.
Breakpoints
Displays the procedure breakpoints: the breakpoint line, statement and the number of its
passes. You can add a breakpoint to the current statement by pressing Ctrl+F8.
Messages
Displays various Stored Procedure Debugger messages.

5.8 UDFs
An UDF (user-defined function) is a database function written entirely in a host language
to perform data manipulation tasks not directly supported by InterBase/Firebird.
Executed on the server.
UDFs give you the possibility to create your own functions (like count) and integrate
them in the database itself. Each UDF is arranged as a function, belonging to DLL. Thus,
one dynamically loaded library consists of one function at least.
Create UDF
To create a new user-defined function:

· Select UDF in the New Object dialog.
· Edit user-defined function definition within the UDF Editor.
Hint: To create new user-defined function you can also right-click the UDFs node of
the explorer tree and select the New UDF... item from the popup menu.
To create a new user-defined function with the same properties as one of the existing
user-defined functions has:

Edit UDF
To edit the existing user-defined function:
· Select the user-defined function for editing in the explorer tree (type the first letters of
the user-defined function name for quick search).
· Right-click and select the Edit UDF <UDF_Name> item from the popup menu or
simply double-click the user-defined function.
· Edit user-defined function definition and description on the appropriate tabs of the UDF
Editor.
To change the name of the user-defined function:
· Select the user-defined function to rename in the explorer tree.

· Right-click and select the Rename UDF <UDF_Name> item from the popup menu.
· Edit user-defined function name in the dialog window.
Drop UDF
To drop a user-defined function:
· Select the user-defined function to drop in the explorer tree.

· Right-click and select the Drop UDF <UDF_Name> item from the popup menu.

5.8.1 UDF Editor

The UDF Editor allows you to define user-defined function properties. It opens when you
create a new user-defined function or edit the existing one (see Create UDF and Edit UDF
for details).
To open a view in the UDF Editor, double-click it in the Explorer Tree.

· Editing user-defined function definition

Availability:
Windows Lite Yes
Object bar:
· Select a database and a user-defined function for editing within the current window.

General bar:
· Compile the current user-defined function definition
· Print metadata of the current user-defined function
· View Dependency Tree for the user-defined function
· Perform quicksave / quickload
The next bar displays various actions according to the current page of UDF Editor.
5.8.1.2 Editing UDF definition
The UDF tab allows you to view and edit the definition for the user-defined function.
Name
Name of the UDF to use in the SQL statements (this name can be different from the
name of the function specified as Entry Point).
Entry Point
Name of the UDF in the source code as stored in the UDF library.
Library Name
File name identifying the library that contains the UDF; the library must be placed in
ib_install_dir/UDF or the complete pathname to the directory, including a drive letter in
the case of a Windows server, must be listed in the InterBase configuration file.
Returns
Return value data type.

By
The way to pass the return value – by value or by reference; if you select 'Reference
(FREE IT)', the memory of the return value will be freed after the UDF finishes running.
Input Parameters
Data types of the input parameters; click Add to add a parameter, click Remove to
remove one.
See also:
UDF Editor


5.9 Exceptions
Exceptions are user-defined errors and messages to use in stored procedures and
triggers.
When raised by a trigger or a stored procedure, the exception:

terminates the trigger or procedure in which it was raised and undoes any actions
performed (directly or indirectly) by it;
returns an error message to the calling application.
Exceptions may be trapped and handled with a WHEN statement in a stored procedure or
trigger.
Create exception
To create a new exception:

· Select Exception in the New Object dialog.
· Edit exception definition within the Exception Editor.
Hint: To create new exception you can also right-click the exceptions node of the
explorer tree and select the New Exception... item from the popup menu.
To create a new exception with the same properties as one of the existing exceptions
has:

Edit exception
To edit the existing exception:
· Select the exception for editing in the explorer tree (type the first letters of the
exception name for quick search).
· Right-click and select the Edit Exception <Exception_Name> item from the popup
menu or simply double-click the exception.
· Edit exception definition and data on the appropriate tabs of the Exception Editor.
To change the name of the exception:
· Select the exception to rename in the explorer tree.

· Right-click and select the Rename Exception <Exception_Name> item from the
popup menu.
· Edit exception name in the dialog window.
Drop exception
To drop a exception:
· Select the exception to drop in the explorer tree.

· Right-click and select the Drop Exception <Exception_Name> item from the popup
menu.
5.9.1 Exception Editor

The Exception Editor allows you to define exception properties. It opens when you
create a new sequence or edit the existing one (see Create Exception and Edit Exception
for details).
To open a view in the Exception Editor, double-click it in the Explorer Tree.

· Editing exception definition


Availability:
Windows Lite Yes
Object bar:
· Select a database and a exception for editing within the current window.
General bar:
· Compile the current exception definition
· Print metadata of the current exception
· View Dependency Tree for the exception
The next bar displays various actions according to the current page of Exception Editor.

5.9.1.2 Editing exception definition
The basic exception parameters are set on the Exception tab.
Name
Name of the exception; it must be unique to the database.
Text
Text of the message, displayed when exception is raised. Maximum string length is 78
characters.
See also:
Exception Editor


5.10 Generators
A generator is a sequential number that can be automatically inserted in a column with
the GEN_ID() function. A generator is often used to ensure a unique value in a PRIMARY
KEY, such as an invoice number, that must uniquely identify the associated row.
A database can contain any number of generators. Generators are global to the
database, and can be used and updated in any transaction. InterBase does not assign
duplicate generator values across transactions.
Create generator
To create a new generator:

· Select Generator in the New Object dialog.
· Edit generator definition within the Generator Editor.
Hint: To create new generator you can also right-click the Generators node of the
explorer tree and select the New Generator... item from the popup menu.
To create a new generator with the same properties as one of the existing generators
has:

Edit generator
To edit the existing generator:
· Select the generator for editing in the explorer tree (type the first letters of the
generator name for quick search).
· Right-click and select the Edit Generator <Generator_Name> item from the popup
menu or simply double-click the generator.
· Edit generator definition and data on the appropriate tabs of the Generator Editor.
To change the name of the generator:
· Select the generator to rename in the explorer tree.

· Right-click and select the Rename Generator <Generator_Name> item from the
popup menu.
· Edit generator name in the dialog window.
Drop generator
To drop a generator:
· Select the generator to drop in the explorer tree.

· Right-click and select the Drop Generator <Generator_Name> item from the popup
menu.

5.10.1 Generator Editor

The Generator Editor allows you to define generator properties. It opens when you
create a new generator or edit the existing one (see Create Generator and Edit Generator
for details).
To open a view in the Generator Editor, double-click it in the Explorer Tree.

· Editing generator definition

See also:
Trigger Editor
Availability:
Windows Lite Yes
Object bar:
· Select a database and a generator for editing within the current window.
General bar:
· Compile the current generator
· Print metadata of the current generator
· View Dependency Tree for the generator
The next bar displays various actions according to the current page of Generator Editor.

5.10.1.2 Editing generator definition
Generator Editor allows you to create new generators and to edit the existing ones.
Name
Name of the generator; it must be unique to the database.
Value
Generator starting value; must be Integer from -2exp31 to 2exp31-1.
See also:
Generators


5.11 BLOB Filters

A Binary Large Object (or BLOB) is a collection of binary data stored as a single entity in
a database management system. BLOBs are typically images, audio or other multimedia
objects, though sometimes binary code is stored as a BLOB.
Blob filters are routines for blobs. They translate blob data from one type to another, i.e.
they allow the contents of blob subtype X to be displayed as subtype Y or vice versa.
These filters are ideal tools for certain binary operations such as the compression and
translation of blobs, depending upon the application requirements.
Blob filters are written in the same way that UDFs are written, and are generally part of
standard libraries, just as UDFs are.
Create BLOB Filter
To create a new default:

· Select BLOB Filter in the New Object dialog.
· Edit BLOB Filter definition within the BLOB Filter Editor.
Hint: To create new BLOB Filter you can also right-click the BLOB Filters node of the
explorer tree and select the New BLOB Filter... item from the popup menu.
To create a new BLOB Filter with the same properties as one of the existing BLOB Filters
has:

Edit BLOB Filter
To edit the existing BLOB Filter:
· Select the BLOB Filter for editing in the explorer tree (type the first letters of the BLOB
Filter name for quick search).
· Right-click and select the Edit BLOB Filter <BLOB Filter_Name> item from the
popup menu or simply double-click the BLOB Filter.
· Edit BLOB Filter definition and data on the appropriate tabs of the BLOB Filter Editor.
To change the name of the BLOB Filter:
· Select the BLOB Filter to rename in the explorer tree.

· Right-click and select the Rename BLOB Filter <BLOB Filter_Name> item from the
popup menu.
· Edit BLOB Filter name in the dialog window.
Drop BLOB Filter

To drop a BLOB Filter:
· Select the BLOB Filter to drop in the explorer tree.

· Right-click and select the Drop BLOB Filter <BLOB Filter_Name> item from the
popup menu.
5.11.1 BLOB Filter Editor

The BLOB Filter Editor allows you to define BLOB Filter properties. It opens when you
create a new BLOB Filter or edit the existing one (see Create BLOB Filter and Edit BLOB
Filter for details).
To open a view in the BLOB Filter Editor, double-click it in the Explorer Tree.


· Editing tablespace definition
Availability:
Windows Lite Yes
Object bar:
· Select a database and a BLOB Filter for editing within the current window.
General bar:
· Show SQL help reference
The next bar displays various actions according to the current page of BLOB Filter
Editor.

5.11.1.2 Editing BLOB Filter definition
Name
Name of the BLOB filter to use in the SQL statements (this name can be different from
the name of the function specified as Entry Point).
Entry Point
Name of the BLOB filter in the source code as stored in the BLOB filter library.
Library Name
File name identifying the library that contains the BLOB filter; the library must be placed
in ib_install_dir/UDF or the complete pathname to the directory, including a drive letter
in the case of a Windows server, must be listed in the InterBase configuration file.
From subtype and To subtype options together determine the behavior of the BLOB
filter.
Each filter declared to the database should have a unique combination of input type and
output type integer values. IB/FB Server provides a built-in type of 1, for handling text.
User-defined types must be expressed as negative values.
See also:
BLOB Filter Editor


5.12 Journals
Journaling means that all transaction changes are safely recorded on durable storage
before the transaction is committed. This guarantees the ACID properties of a
transaction (the database industry standards for Atomicity, Consistency, Isolation, and
Durability). A journal archive is the set of destination directories that will hold the current
set of journal files for a particular database. The purpose of the Journal archive is to
support long-term database recovery.
Note that creating journals is only implemented in InterBase 2007.
Create Journal
To create a new journal:

· Select Journal in the New Object dialog.
· Set journal properties within the Journal Editor.
Hint: To create a journal you can also right-click the Journals node of the explorer
tree and select the Create Journal item from the popup menu.
Viewing Journal
To view the existing journal:
· Right-click the Journals node of the explorer tree and select the View Journal item
from the popup menu or simply double-click the Journals node.
Drop Journal
To drop the journal:
· Select the Journals node in the explorer tree.

· Right-click and select the Drop Journal item from the popup menu.

5.12.1 Creating journal

To create a journal you can also right-click the Journals node of the Explorer Tree and
select the Create Journal item from the popup menu.
The navigation bar on the left within the Journals window allows you to:
General bar:
· Compile the current user-defined function definition
The Journal tab contains several options control the journaling configuration of a
database.
Length
Specifies the number of pages that will be written to the journal file before initiating a
rollover to a new journal file. A single journal file is limited to 2GB in size.
Page size
Determines the size of a journal page in bytes. A journal page size must be at least twice
the size of a database page
size. If a journal page size of less is specified, it will be rounded up to twice the database
page size and a warning
will be returned.
Page cache
Determines the number of journal buffers that will be allocated. The size of each buffer is

the same as the journal

page size.
Checkpoint length
Determines the number of journal pages to be written before initiating a database
checkpoint.
Checkpoint interval
Determines the number of seconds between database checkpoints.
Note: If both Checkpoint length and Checkpoint interval are specified, whichever
event occurs first will initiate a database checkpoint.
Use timestamp name

Determines whether or not to append the file creation timestamp to the base journal file
name. If this option is on, the base journal file name will be appended with a timestamp
of the form: <YYYY>_<MM>_DD>T<hh>_<mm>_ss>Z.<sequence-number>.journal
The DDL tab displays current journal DDL.
5.12.2 Journal management

In the Journals node all archived items are denoted by an archive sequence number
that corresponds to the order in which the items were created in the archive.

Dropping the journal disables journal archiving for the database. It causes all journal
files and database file dumps to be deleted in all journal archive directories. To drop the
journal please select the Journals node in DB Explorer tree and choose the Drop
Journal context menu item.
If you allow it, the archive will grow in storage size infinitely as the database and the
most current journal files are continually archived. To garbage-collect archive items less
than an archive sequence number, select the desired archive sequence number and
choose the Sweep until context menu item.

As the number of journal files grows in the archive when you have not created more
recent archived database dumps, the time that you will need to recover a database from
the archive also grows. Therefore, it is a good practice to periodically create additional
database dumps in the archive. To create a new backup you please select the
corresponding item from the Journals node context menu.
On selecting the new backup item the Backup Database Wizard window will appear

with all the needful parameters set.

5.13 Database Triggers

Use database triggers only for centralized, global operations that should be fired for the
triggering statement, regardless of which user or database application issues the
statement.
Creating DB Trigger
To create a new DB trigger:

· select the Database | New Object... main menu item;
· select DB Trigger in the Create New Object dialog;
· define DB trigger properties using the appropriate tabs of DB Trigger Editor.
Hint: To create a new DB trigger, you can also right-click the DB Triggers node or any
object within this node in the DB Explorer tree and select the New DB Trigger item from
the context menu.
To create a new DB trigger with the same properties as one of existing DB triggers has:
· select the Database | Duplicate Object... main menu item;
· follow the instructions of Duplicate Object Wizard.
Alternatively, you can right-click a DB trigger in the DB Explorer tree and select the
Duplicate DB Trigger <DB trigger_name>... context menu item.
Duplicate Object Wizard allows you to select the database to create a new DB trigger in,
and to edit the result SQL statement for creating the DB trigger.
Editing DB Triggers
To edit an existing DB trigger:

· select the DB trigger for editing in the DB Explorer tree (type the first letters of the
DB trigger name for quick search);
· right-click the object and select the Edit DB Trigger <DB trigger_name> context
menu item, or simply double-click the DB trigger;
· edit DB trigger properties using the appropriate tabs of DB Trigger Editor.
Dropping DB Trigger
To drop a DB trigger:
· select the DB trigger to drop in the DB Explorer tree;
· right-click the object and select the Drop DB Trigger <DB trigger_name>...
context menu item;
· confirm dropping in the dialog window.
Note: If more convenient, you can also use the following shortcuts:
Ctrl+N to create a new DB trigger;
Ctrl+O to edit the selected DB trigger;
Shift+Del to drop the object from the database.

5.13.1 Database Trigger Editor

Database Trigger Editor allows you to define role properties and membership. It opens
automatically when you create a new DB trigger and is available on deleting existing one.
To open a DB trigger in Database Trigger Editor, double-click it in the DB Explorer

tree.
· Using Navigation bar
· Editing DB Trigger definition
· Setting object permissions
5.13.1.1 Using Navigation bar
The Navigation bar of Database Trigger Editor allows you to:
Object bar:
Select a database and a procedure for editing within the current window.
General bar:
· Compile current object

· Execute the current DB trigger
· Debug the current procedure

· Print metadata of the current object

· View Dependency Tree for the object
Variable bar allows you managing DB trigger input parameters.
Depending on the current tab selection, the Navigation bar expands to one or more
additional panes with tab-specific actions that can be useful for working with the object.
<< Back to Role Editor
5.13.1.2 Editing DB Trigger definition
Use the Database Trigger Editor to specify current DB trigger properties.
Name
Set the DB trigger name.
On event
Specify the event on occurrence of which the trigger fires:
Connect
Database connection established
A transaction is started
Triggers are fired - uncaught exceptions rollback the transaction, disconnect the

attachment and are returned to the client.
Disconnect
A transaction is started
Triggers are fired - uncaught exceptions rollback the transaction, disconnect the
attachment and are swallowed
The transaction is committed.
Transaction start
Triggers are fired in the newly user created transaction - uncaught exceptions are
returned to the client and the transaction is rolled-back.
Transaction commit
Triggers are fired in the committing transaction - uncaught exceptions rollback the
triggers savepoint, the commit command is aborted and the exception is returned to the
client.
Transaction rollback
Triggers are fired in the rolling-back transaction - changes done will be rolled-back
together with the transaction and exceptions are swallowed.
In the lower part of the Database Trigger Editor you can view and edit the definition
for current DB trigger.
The Variables tab provides managing abilities for variables. Use context menu items or
corresponding items of the Variables pan (Navigation bar).


Part
VI
6 Query management tools

When using SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird, you are provided with two
basic tools you may need to manage your SQL queries: SQL Editor for editing SQL query
text directly and Visual Query Builder for building queries visually. Find the list of
common SQL query management operations below.
Creating new queries
In order to create a new query in SQL Editor:

· select the Tools | New SQL Editor main menu item or use the corresponding
toolbar button;
· click the Add new query item of the Navigation bar;
· edit the query text within the Edit tab of SQL Editor.
In order to create a new query in Query Builder:

· select the Tools | New Query Builder main menu item or use the corresponding
toolbar button;
· build the query visually within the Builder tab of Visual Query Builder.
Editing queries
In order to open a query in SQL Editor:

· select the Tools | Show SQL Editor main menu item or use the corresponding
toolbar button;
· use the numbered tabs at the bottom of the editor window to switch between
previously edited queries. The last edited query is displayed automatically on opening
the editor;
In order to open a query in Query Builder:

· select the Tools | Show Query Builder main menu item or use the corresponding
toolbar button;
· the last edited query is displayed automatically on opening Query Builder;
· to load a previously saved diagram, click the Load diagram item of the Navigation
bar;
· to load a query from an *.sql file, open the Edit tab and click the Load SQL button of
the Navigation bar;
· edit the query visually within the Builder and/or the Edit tabs of Visual Query
Builder.
In order to load a query from an *.sql file:

· select the Tools | New SQL Editor main menu item or use the corresponding
toolbar button;
· click the Load from file item of the Navigation bar;
· browse for the query file using the Open SQL File dialog;
Executing queries
In order to execute a query:

· create a new query or open an existing one;

· click the Execute item of the Navigation bar or use the F9 hot-key to execute the
query;
· view/edit the returned data within the Results tab of SQL Editor.
Saving queries
In order to save a query:

· create a new query or open an existing one;
· click the Save to file Navigation bar item (in SQL Editor) or the Save SQL
Navigation bar item (in Query Builder), or use the Ctrl+S shortcut to save the query
using the Save as... dialog;
· click the Save diagram Navigation bar item in Visual Query Builder to save the
designed diagram;
or
· use the Save all Navigation bar item in SQL Editor if you need to save all the queries
to one file.
See also:
Getting started
Database Explorer
Database management
Data management
Import/Export tools
Database tools
Server tools
Personalization
External tools

6.1 SQL Editor

SQL Editor is the basic tool of SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird for creating and
executing queries. The tool allows you to create and edit the SQL text of a query, prepare
and execute queries and view the results of query execution.
To open SQL Editor, select the Tools | New SQL Editor / Tools | Show SQL Editor
main menu items or use the corresponding / toolbar buttons. You can also use the
Shift + F12 / F12 shortcuts for the same purpose.

· Working with SQL Editor area
· Using the context menu
· Using object links
· Executing queries and viewing results
· Viewing query logs
· Favorites editor
See also:
Visual Query Builder
Query parameters
6.1.1 Using Navigation bar

The Navigation bar of SQL Editor allows you to:
· select a database for the query;
· execute the current query;
· view estimated query execution plan;
· show/hide information messages;
· add a new query (note that the current query text will NOT be lost);
· remove the current query;
· remove all queries from the editor;
· rename the query;
· run Visual Query Builder to design the query as a diagram;
· switch the results representation mode: on Edit tab or on separate tab;
· configure SQL Editor within the Tools | SQL Editor page of the Environment Options
dialog;
· add the query to the Favorite Queries list using Favorites editor;
· activate the Find Text dialog;
· load a query from an *.sql file using the Open SQL File dialog;
· save the query to an *.sql file using the Save as... dialog;
· save all the queries to an *.sql file;
· commit/rollback the transaction;
· export the returned dataset using Export Data Wizard;
· export data as SQL Script using the Export as SQL Script wizard;
· import data into the table using Import Data Wizard.

See also:
Working with SQL Editor area
Using the context menu
Viewing query plan

Using object links

Executing queries
Viewing query logs
Favorites editor
6.1.2 Working with SQL Editor area

The Editor area of SQL Editor is available within the Edit tab and is provided for working
with SQL queries in text mode.
For your convenience the syntax highlight, code completion and a number of other
features for efficient SQL editing are implemented. If necessary, you can enable/disable
or customize most of SQL Editor features using the Editor Options dialog.
The example of code completion is illustrated in the picture below. You can set the delay
within the Quick code section of the Editor Options dialog or activate the completion list
manually by pressing the Ctrl+Space shortcut.

Hint: To paste input parameters of a procedure quickly, use the Ctrl+Shift+P shortcut
after the procedure name.
Hint: To use a keyboard template, type the template name and press the Ctrl+J
shortcut: the text associated with the template will be inserted automatically.
If necessary, you can print the SQL text of your query using the corresponding item of
the context menu.
See also:
Using Navigation bar
Viewing query plan
Using object links
Executing queries
Viewing query logs
Favorites editor
6.1.3 Using the context menu

The context menu of SQL Editor area contains execution commands, most of the
standard text-processing functions (Cut, Copy, Paste, Select All) and functions for
working with the query as a whole, e.g. you can move the cursor to a particular line,
change the case of selected text, view the query properties or print the text of the query.
Each of these operations can be also performed with the corresponding hot keys used.
Implementation of the Find Text and the Replace Text dialogs contributes to more
efficient work with the SQL code.
Find the complete list of SQL Editor context menu items below. The context menu allows
you to:
· add the selected text to dictionary or correct text (see Spell checking for details);
· execute the query/selected text/text under cursor, and reset execution point (if
necessary);
· manage markers: Drop Marker, Collect Marker, Swap Marker;
· toggle bookmarks allowing you to navigate through the query text and jump to a line
with a particular number;
· perform editing operations: Undo/Redo, Cut, Copy, Paste, Select all;
· perform search and replace operations;
· save/load a query to/from an external *.sql file;
· perform preview/print operations;
· use the Quick code group allowing you to format the selected code using SQL
Formatter to make the code easier to read, toggle comments for code fragments,
change case of the selected text, indent/unindent code lines;

· add the query to the Favorite Queries list;

· open the Editor Options dialog.
See also:
Viewing query plan
Using object links
Executing queries
Viewing query logs

Favorites editor
6.1.4 Viewing query plan

Using SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird, you can view the plan for each of the
queries created and executed in the application. The query plan is available within the
corresponding Plan tab.
To view the Plan of a query, open the query in SQL Editor and use the Show
estimated execution plan item of the Navigation bar.
The Plan tab allows you to view the sequence of actions performed by the database
server in the process of the query execution, and the amount of system resources used
for the query execution. Note that this tab only appears after you have executed the
query.
If necessary, you can specify that the Plan tab appears automatically upon query
execution in SQL Editor: select the Show actual execution plan on query
execution option available within the Tools | SQL Editor section of the Environment
Options dialog.

See also:
Using object links
Executing queries
Viewing query logs
Favorites editor
6.1.5 Using object links

Objects that exist in the database are highlighted in the text as hyperlinks. You can open
an object in the appropriate editor by clicking the object name in the text with the Ctrl
key pressed.
Please note that you can change the way highlighted objects look in the editor: use the
Color section of the Editor Options dialog.
See also:
Viewing query plan
Executing queries
Viewing query logs
Favorites editor
6.1.6 Executing queries

When all the query parameters are set, you can immediately execute the query in SQL
Editor.
To execute a query, click the Execute item of the Navigation bar. You can also use the
context menu or F9 hot key for the same purpose.
If the SQL syntax is correct, the query is executed and, in case the query statement is
supposed to return data (e.g. as SELECT statement), the returned dataset appears within
the Results tab. The position of the tab depends on the Results on Edit tab / Results
on separate tab selection in the Navigation bar.
If SQL syntax of the query contains any errors, the query execution is stopped and the
corresponding error message is displayed in the status bar area at the bottom of the
editor window.

By default, data returned by a query are displayed as a grid (see Data View for details).
The context menu of the grid allows you to Export Data, Export as SQL Script.
See also:
Viewing query plan
Using object links
Viewing query logs
Favorites editor
6.1.7 Viewing query logs

This tab allows you to view the query log. The log is available within the Logs tab of
SQL Editor.

Using this tab you can view the text of each query, information on the date and time of
the query execution, the number of rows fetched, etc. With the help of the context menu
the log can be printed, saved to file or cleared. You can also use a number of SQL Editor
context menu generic functions.
See also:
Viewing query plan
Using object links
Executing queries
Favorites editor
6.1.8 Favorites editor

For your convenience the Favorite Queries list is implemented in SQL Manager 2008 for
InterBase/Firebird. This list is available within the Favorite Queries node of

Database Explorer and allows you to store the most frequently used SQL queries in one
location.
To add a query to the Favorite Queries list, use the Add to Favorite Queries
Navigation bar item in SQL Editor. The corresponding item is also available in the
context menu of SQL Editor working area.
You can edit any of your Favorite Queries using Favorites editor.
Name
Set the name of the Favorite query.
Storage
Specify where the Favorite query will be stored: in Windows Registry or in the Database.
See also:
Viewing query plan

Using object links

Executing queries
Viewing query logs

6.2 Visual Query Builder

Visual Query Builder is implemented in SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird for
building queries visually. The tool allows you to create and edit queries without deep
knowledge of SQL. You can also prepare and execute queries, and view the results of
their execution.
To open Visual Query Builder, select the Tools | New Query Builder / Tools | Show
Query Builder main menu items or use the corresponding / toolbar buttons.

· Working with diagram area
· Joining two database objects by fields
· Setting the selection criteria
· Setting output fields for selection
· Setting the grouping criteria
· Setting parameters of sorting
· Working with editor area
· Executing queries and viewing results
See also:
SQL Editor
Query parameters
6.2.1 Using Navigation bar

The Navigation bar of Visual Query Builder allows you to:
· select a database for the query;
· execute the current query;
· view estimated query execution plan;
· clear the query;
· create a view;
· configure Query Builder using the Query Builder Options page;
· restore the default size of the builder window;
· load a diagram from a *.vqb file using the Open diagram dialog;
· save the diagram to a *.vqb file using the Save diagram as... dialog;
· export the returned dataset using Export Data Wizard;
· export data as SQL Script using the Export as SQL Script wizard;
· browse objects of the database; you can also add tables and views to the diagram
using drag-and-drop operations.

See also:
Working with diagram area
Joining two objects
Setting criteria
Setting output fields
Setting grouping criteria
Setting sorting parameters
Working with the editor area
Query execution
Viewing query plan
6.2.2 Working with diagram area

The main working area of Visual Query Builder is the diagram area available within
the Builder tab. Here you can create a query by placing the database tables and views

onto the area, and edit it by selecting the required data fields and setting links between
objects.
To add an object to the query, you can simply drag it from the DB Explorer tree to the
diagram area.
To include a field in the query, check the corresponding box located to the left from the
field name in the list, or just double-click it. To include all fields of the table/view, check
the box located to the left of the table/view caption. If you do not check any fields, the
SQL statement is generated as SELECT * FROM <table/view_name>, i.e. all the fields are
included in the query.
To exclude a field from the query, uncheck the respective box. In order to remove the
entire table/view from the query, close it by clicking the corresponding cross-button at
the object caption, or select the object and press the Del key.
To edit the alias of a table/view, double-click the object caption and enter the new name.
See also:
Joining two objects

Setting criteria
Query execution
Viewing query plan
6.2.3 Joining two objects

The diagram area allows you to associate two objects by their fields: this operation is
performed by dragging a field from one object list to another. This will set a link between
these objects by the selected fields. It is indicated by a bidirectional arrow between the
linked fields.
You can view the link properties of objects association: set the mouse cursor over the
linking arrow, and a hint containing the association condition will popup after a short
delay.
To edit the link properties, double-click the linking arrow or right-click it and select the
Property popup menu item. The Link properties dialog allows you to change the
association condition by choosing it from the drop-down list (=, >, <, >=, <=, <>).

For your convenience the Include all option is available for each object of the
association. Click OK to apply the changes you have made.
To remove a link between objects, right-click the linking arrow and select the Delete
link popup menu item.
To add a point to the link line, right-click the linking arrow and select the Insert point
popup menu item. Using the point you can move the link line easily. The point does not
cause any changes to the query, it is only used for the diagram representation and
makes visual building handy and more comprehensible.
See also:
Setting criteria
Query execution
Viewing query plan
6.2.4 Setting criteria

Use the Criteria tab to set the selection conditions.
To add a condition, click the ellipsis button on the left, and select the Add condition
popup menu item.
Edit the condition by clicking the elements of the condition pattern and setting the
necessary values. Clicking the numbered button to the left of the condition string
activates the popup menu which allows you to add a new condition of the same enclosure
level, add a new enclosure level, delete the current condition, expand or collapse
enclosure levels of the condition (if the condition is composite).

A simple condition pattern contains three elements: an argument, a condition operator

and a second argument (if required for the condition).
Clicking each element field allows you to set its value. When clicking the argument field,
you can edit the argument as a text string: set an object name or a certain value in this
field. Right-clicking the field in the edit mode activates the popup menu with the Insert
field function (also called by the Shift+Enter shortcut). This function allows you to select
a field from the list of all the table fields.
Clicking the condition operator field activates the popup menu where you can specify the
condition you need.
The way the conditions are used is set in the upper string of the area (All, Any, None or
Not all of the following are met). Click the green link to change it.
See also:


Joining two objects
Query execution
Viewing query plan
6.2.5 Setting output fields

The Selection tab displays the output fields of the query as a grid.
The grid allows you to edit the names of the query output fields, specify their displaying
order and set the aggregate functions (SUM, MIN, MAX, AVG, and COUNT) for each field.
To remove a field from the list, right-click the field row and select the Delete current
row popup menu item. To change the input query field, double click it and then type the
field name on the keyboard or choose it from the drop-down list.
To change the output query field name, set the cursor at the corresponding column and
type the required field name.
To set an aggregate function for a field, click the field row within the Aggregate column,
and then type in the function name or select one from the drop-down list.
The Grouping column displays the grouping state for each of the output fields.
Select only unique records

If you check this option, the duplicate records (if any) are not included into the query
result (i.e. the DISTINCT keyword is added to the SQL query text).

See also:
Joining two objects
Setting criteria
Query execution
Viewing query plan

6.2.6 Setting grouping criteria

The Grouping criteria tab allows you to set conditions for grouping query records.
The grouping condition pattern fields are set in the same way as those of the Criteria
pattern.
These conditions will be included in the HAVING statement of the generated SQL query.
See also:
Joining two objects
Setting criteria


Query execution
Viewing query plan
6.2.7 Setting sorting parameters

The Sorting tab allows you to set sorting parameters for the records returned by the
query.
The working area contains the Output fields list (at the left) which represents all the
output query fields, and the Sorted fields list (at the right) which contains the fields to
sort records by.
To move a field from one list to another, drag the selected field or use the Add and
Remove buttons.
To change the sorting order for a sorted field, select the field in the Sorted fields list
and move it using the Up and Down buttons.
To change the sorting direction, select the field in the Sorted fields list and switch the
direction (Ascending, Descending) using the corresponding A..Z/Z..A button.

See also:
Joining two objects
Setting criteria
Query execution
Viewing query plan
6.2.8 Working with the editor area

The Editor area of Visual Query Builder is available within the Edit tab and is
provided for working directly with the SQL query text which is generated automatically

while you build the query visually.
You can edit this text according to the rules of SQL, and all the changes will be displayed
within the Builder tab respectively.
To learn more about the SQL Editor features available within the Edit tab, see Working
with SQL Editor area.
See also:
Joining two objects
Setting criteria
Query execution
Viewing query plan

6.2.9 Query execution

When all the query parameters are set, you can immediately execute the query in
Visual Query Builder.
To execute a query, click the Execute query item of the Navigation bar. You can also
use the F9 hot key for the same purpose.
If the query parameters are specified correctly, the query is executed and, in case the
query statement is supposed to return data (e.g. as SELECT statement), the returned
dataset appears within the Result tab.
If SQL syntax of the query contains any errors, the query execution is stopped and the
corresponding error message is displayed in the status bar area at the bottom of the
Builder window.
By default, data returned by a query are displayed as a grid (see Data View for details).
The context menu of the grid allows you to Export Data, Export As SQL Script.

See also:
Joining two objects
Setting criteria
Viewing query plan
6.2.10 Viewing query plan

Using SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird, you can view the plan for each of the
queries created and executed in the application. The query plan is available within the
corresponding Plan tab.
To view the Plan of a query, open Query Builder and use the Show estimated
execution plan item of the Navigation bar.
The Plan tab allows you to view the sequence of actions performed by the database
server in the process of the query execution, and the amount of system resources used
for the query execution. Note that this tab only appears after you have executed the
query.

If necessary, you can specify that the Plan tab appears automatically upon query
execution in Query Builder: select the Show actual execution plan on query
execution option available within the Tools | Query Builder section of the Environment
Options dialog.
See also:
Joining two objects
Setting criteria
Query execution

6.3 Query parameters

Both SQL Editor and Visual Query Builder support parameters usage inside the query
text. A parameter is a kind of variable for which a value can be specified just before the
query execution. In the query text the parameter should appear as an identifier with a
colon (':') at the beginning, e.g.
:param1.
Note: The Allow using of parameters in query text option should be checked on the
Options | Environment options | Tools page for this feature to be enabled.
See also:
SQL Editor
Visual Query Builder
6.3.1 Input parameters dialog

The Input Parameters dialog is used to specify the query parameters as well as values
of the input parameters of the procedure or function before execution.
Click OK button to apply the values and execute the query or click Cancel button to
abort execution.

Part
VII
7 Data management
Table data and query results are displayed on the Data or Results tab of Table Editor,
SQL Editor, Visual Query Builder, etc.
Data can be displayed in one of the following modes: Grid View, Form View, Print
Data, BLOB View. See Data View to learn more about these modes. You are also
provided with a number of filtering tools when working with your data.
· Data View
· Custom Filter
· Filter Builder dialog
See also:
Getting started
Database Explorer
Database management
Import/Export tools
Database tools
Server tools
Personalization
External tools

7.1 Data View

SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird provides you with powerful tools for viewing,
editing and printing data from tables and queries:
· table / view data are available within the Data tab of Table Editor / View Editor
correspondingly;
· upon a query execution the returned dataset appears within the Result(s) tab of
SQL Editor / Query Builder (in SQL Editor the position of the tab depends on the
Results on Edit tab / Results on separate tab selection in the Navigation bar).
The data can be displayed in one of four available modes: Grid View, Form View, Print
Data and BLOB View. The status bar at the bottom displays the number of records in
the current dataset, the time the records were fetched by the application and the status
of the records (whether the data are read-only or editable).
Please see the succeeding chapters to learn how to work with your data in the simplest
and most efficient way.
· Grid View
· Form View
· Print Data
· BLOB View
See also:
Custom Filter
Filter Builder Dialog
7.1.1 Grid View

By default, data returned by a query are displayed as a grid. It is indicated by the Grid
View tab selected on the View mode panel at the bottom of the Results area of the
window.
When in the Grid View mode, the columns correspond to the fields and the rows
correspond to the records. Clicking the column caption sorts data by the values of this
column in the ascending or the descending mode. The navigation pane at the top of the
grid allows you to browse the data quickly, to insert, update and delete records, and to
set a filter for the records using the Filter Builder dialog.
The Navigation bar of the parent window and the context menu of the grid provide you
with a number of data management functions: Export Data, Import Data, Export As SQL
Script and more.
· Grouping data within the grid

· Filtering records
· Working in multi-level mode
· Viewing data in card view

See also:
Form View
Print Data
BLOB View
7.1.1.1 Grouping data
If necessary, you can group the data in grid by any of the columns.
This operation is performed by dragging the column header to the gray "Group by" box
area at the top. In order to display this area, select the Show "Group by" box
option available in the Grid section of the Environment Options dialog.

When grouping by a column is applied to the grid, all the records are displayed as
subnodes to the grouping row value as displayed in the screenshot below. To reverse
grouping, just drag the column header back.
See also:
Filtering records
Working in multi-level
mode
Create Grid Level wizard
Working in card view mode
Column Summary

7.1.1.2 Filtering records
A number of filtering facilities are implemented in the grid for your convenience. You
can filter records in the grid in either of the following ways:
· right-click a row and select the Quick Filter context menu item to filter records by
the current value of the selected column;

· click the Arrow-Down button next to the column caption to display the drop-down list
and select any of the column values to filter records by this value of the selected
column;

or
· click the Arrow-Down button next to the column caption to display the drop-down list,
then select the Custom item and build a simple filter using the Custom Filter dialog;
· use the Set filter button on the navigation pane to invoke the Filter Builder dialog
and create a composite filter using the dialog.
After the filter is set, the gray filtering panel becomes visible at the bottom of the grid.
This panel allows you to see the active filtering condition and easily enable or disable it
using the checkbox on the left. If necessary, you can click the Customize... button on
the right to customize your filter and add more complicated filtering conditions within
the Filter Builder dialog.
See also:
Grouping data
mode
Column Summary

7.1.1.3 Using the context menu
The context menu of the grid is aimed at facilitating your work with data: you can
perform a variety of operations using the context menu items:
· copy the selected cell value to Windows clipboard;
· paste the clipboard content to the currently selected cell;
· copy/paste multiple records;
· data manipulation: Export Data from the table, Import Data to the table, Export Data
as SQL Script;
· set/disable Quick Filter;
· clear sorting;
· set a value for the selected cell: NULL, Empty string (for string fields), Now (for TIME
fields), "Zero" (for DATE fields);
· edit the BLOB value or save the BLOB to file using BLOB viewer/editor;
· expand/collapse grid levels and navigate within the tabs;
· manage grid levels: add a new grid level, delete the current grid level;
· switch to the Card View mode, if necessary;
· view Column Summary;
· select visible/invisible columns of the dataset;
· fit column width for better representation;
· specify the grid mode: Load All Rows, Load Visible Rows, Default;
· view/edit grid properties.

See also:
Grouping data
Filtering records
mode
Column Summary

7.1.1.4 Working in multi-level mode
One of unique features of SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird is the ability to work
with data in multi-level mode to view and modify data in several related tables
simultaneously.
To manage grid levels, right-click the grid and select the Grid Levels context menu
group. Items of this group allow you to:
· add a new grid level using Create Grid Level Wizard;
· delete the current grid level;
· switch between the ordinary Table View and the Card View modes.
See also:
Grouping data

Filtering records
Column Summary
7.1.1.5 Create Grid Level wizard
Create Grid Level Wizard allows you to add a new detail level to the grid in order to
get master-detail representation of your data.
To start the wizard, right-click the grid, select the Grid Levels context menu group and
proceed to the Add Grid Level... item within this group.
· Specifying master level

· Selecting source table
· Binding master and detail levels
· Query parameterization
· Setting additional parameters
See also:
Grouping data
Filtering records
mode
Column Summary
7.1.1.5.1 Specifying master level
Use the drop-down list to select the table of the master level to which a new level will
be added.
Source of new level data

Select the source type of the new level data: Table or Query.

Click the Next button to proceed to the Defining source for detail level step to select a
table for the detail level or input a query, depending on whether the Table or the
Query option has been selected.
7.1.1.5.2 Defining source for detail level
If the Table option has been selected at the previous step, you should now specify a
table for the detail view using the Table name drop-down list. Set the Show tables
related by foreign keys only option to narrow the list of tables by including only tables
linked by Foreign keys.

If the Query option has been selected at the previous step, you should now enter a
query that will be used as the source of the new grid level. If necessary, you can use
Query Builder to build the SQL query visually.
Click the Next button to proceed to the Binding master and detail levels step of the
wizard.
7.1.1.5.3 Binding master and detail levels
Define pairs of fields to link the Master Level and the Detail Level data sources:
· select a field in the Master Level Key Fields list;
· select a corresponding field in the Detail Level Key Fields list;
· click Add to set correspondence between the selected fields.
The newly created correspondences are listed in the Links Between Master and Detail
Levels area. If necessary, you can delete any correspondence using the the Remove
button.

Click the Next button to proceed to the Setting additional parameters step or to the
Query parameterization step of the wizard if Query was selected at the Specifying
master level step of the wizard.
7.1.1.5.4 Query parameterization
If Query was selected at the Specifying master level step of the wizard, you should
now transform the query to a parameterized form that will be used in the 'Load visible
rows' Grid Mode (see the Grid | Data Options section of the Environment Options dialog
to get more information about Grid modes offered by SQL Manager).

Click the Next button to proceed to the Setting additional parameters step of the wizard.
7.1.1.5.5 Setting additional parameters
Level caption
Set the caption to be used for the new level in the grid.
Level type
Select the type of view you wish to be applied to the grid level: Table view or Card
view.

When you are done, click the Finish button to complete the operation.
7.1.1.6 Working in card view mode
Depending on your preferences, you can represent data in the Table View or in the
Card View modes.
To switch to the Card View mode of data representation, right-click the grid, expand
the Grid Levels context menu group and select the Card View item within this group.

See also:
Grouping data
Filtering records
mode
Column Summary

7.1.1.7 Column Summary
If necessary, you can select the Column Summary... context menu item to open the
Column Summary dialog which allows you to view and edit the summary for each
particular column.
See also:
Grouping data
Filtering records
mode
7.1.2 Form View

The Form View tab allows you to view data as a form. To activate this type of data view,
select the Form View tab on the View mode panel at the bottom of the Results area of
the window.
The form displays the current record: field names on the left and the corresponding
values on the right. If the fields are available for editing, you can edit the record directly
on this form. The navigation pane at the top of the form allows you to browse the data
quickly, to insert, update and delete records, and to set a filter for the records using the
Filter Builder dialog.

Each field has a Null checkbox which allows you to clear the field value and set it to
NULL (if the field is nullable).
See also:
Grid View
Print Data
BLOB View

7.1.3 Print Data

Using the Print Data tab you can view data in the way they are printed, in WYSIWYG
mode.
When in Print Data mode, you are provided with a powerful toolbar allowing you to
design a report, change the view scope, save reports and load previously saved ones,
and set a number of page printing parameters.
See also:
Grid View
Form View
BLOB View

7.1.4 BLOB View

SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird provides BLOB Viewer/Editor to view and edit
BLOB fields content. The BLOB Viewer/Editor can be invoked from the data grid within
Table Editor, SQL Editor, Visual Query Builder, etc.
· Navigation within the BLOB Viewer/Editor

· Viewing/Editing BLOB field as Hexadecimal dump
· Viewing/Editing BLOB field as plain Text
· Viewing/Editing BLOB field as Rich Text (RTF)
· Viewing/Editing BLOB field as Image
· Viewing/Editing BLOB field as HTML
· Applying changes

See also:
Grid View
Form View
Print Data
7.1.4.1 Navigation within BLOB Editor
The BLOB Viewer/Editor provides an ability to navigate within the records using DB
Navigation buttons on the navigation pane at the top of the viewer window.
Using items of the navigation pane and the drop-down menu you can to browse the data
quickly, to insert, update and delete records, set a filter for the records using the Filter
Builder dialog, load new BLOB content and save the current content to files.
The toolbar allows you to switch the fields and perform a number of editing operations.
The set of toolbar items depends on the current selection and view mode.

See also:
Editing as Hexadecimal
Editing as Text
Editing as Rich Text
Editing as Image
Editing as HTML
Applying changes
7.1.4.2 Editing as Hexadecimal
The Hexadecimal tab allows you to view/edit the BLOB data as hexadecimal.

The toolbar provides additional functionality for BLOB Viewer/Editor: use the Save to file
and the Load from file toolbar buttons to save the hexadecimal data to a file, or
load data from a file.
Use the Ins key to switch between the Insert and Overwrite modes.
See also:
Navigation within BLOB
Editor
Editing as Text
Editing as Image
Editing as HTML

Applying changes
7.1.4.3 Editing as Text
The Text tab allows you to view/edit the BLOB data as simple text.
and the Load from file toolbar buttons to save the text to a *.txt file, or load text
from a file. Additionally, you can use the Cut, Copy, Paste, Select All, Undo, Word Wrap
context menu items for editing the text efficiently, and the Print context menu item to
print the content of the Text tab.
Note that encoding of the text can be selected at the toolbar.
See also:


Editor
Editing as Image
Editing as HTML
Applying changes
7.1.4.4 Editing as Rich Text
The Rich Text tab allows you to view/edit the BLOB data in Rich Text format (RTF).
and the Load from file toolbar buttons to save the Rich Text to a *.rtf file, or
load text from a file. Additionally, you can use the Cut, Copy, Paste, Select All, Undo
context menu items for editing the text efficiently, and the Print context menu item to
print the content of the Rich Text tab.

See also:
Editor
Editing as Text
Editing as Image
Editing as HTML
Applying changes

7.1.4.5 Editing as Image
The Image tab allows you to view the BLOB data as image.
and the Load from file toolbar buttons to save the image to a *.bmp, *.wmf,
*.ico or *.jpg file, or load an image from a file.
See also:
Editor
Editing as Text
Editing as HTML
Applying changes
7.1.4.6 Editing as HTML
The HTML tab allows you to view the BLOB data as HTML (Hyper-Text Markup Language
format) - in the way this data would be displayed by your Internet browser.

and the Load from file toolbar buttons to save the content as a *.html, or *.htm
file, or load content from a file.
See also:
Editor
Editing as Text
Editing as Image
Applying changes

7.1.4.7 Applying changes
After changes are done, click the Post Edit button on the navigation pane to apply
the changes or the Cancel Edit button to discard the changes.
See also:
Editor
Editing as Text
Editing as Image

Editing as HTML

7.2 Custom Filter

The Custom Filter dialog is one of the filtering facilities implemented in Data View for
your convenience.
To open the dialog, click the Arrow-Down button next to the column caption, and select
the Custom item from the drop-down list.
Select a logical operator for checking the column values (like, is less than, is greater than
, etc.) and set a value to be checked by this operator in the corresponding box on the
right.
If necessary, you can set the second condition and specify the relation between the two
conditions: whether both of them should be satisfied (AND) or just any of them (OR).
Use the '_' character to represent any single symbol, and use the '%' character to
represent any series of symbols in the condition string.
See also:
Data View
Filter Builder Dialog

7.3 Filter Builder dialog

The Filter Builder dialog is a powerful filtering tool implemented in Data View for your
convenience.
The dialog is aimed at facilitating the procedure of creating and applying complex filter
criteria for data. In addition, the tool allows you to save filter criteria to an external *.flt
file for future use.
To open the Filter Builder dialog, use the Set filter button on the navigation pane
available within the Data tab of Table Editor and the Result(s) tabs of SQL Editor and
Query Builder.
· Invoking the Filter Builder dialog

· Adding a new condition to the filter
· Setting filter criteria
· Setting filter operator
· Setting filter criteria values
· Adding a new group
· Setting group operator
· Applying filter conditions
See also:
Data View
Custom Filter
7.3.1 Invoking the Filter Builder dialog

The Filter Builder dialog can be invoked in either of the following ways:
· if a simple filter or the Custom Filter is being used, click the Customize... button on
the gray filtering panel;
· use the Set filter button on the navigation pane and create a composite filter
using the dialog.
The succeeding pages of this chapter are intended to illustrate usage of the Filter
Builder dialog. Please see the instructions below to learn how to perform various
operations in the easiest way.
See also:
Adding a new condition

Setting filter criteria

Setting filter operator
Setting filter criteria values
Adding a new group
Setting group operator
Applying filter conditions
7.3.2 Adding a new condition

Suppose we need to select data from the sample table Employee to view the list of male
engineers belonging to the Engineering and Tool Design departments that were hired
after 10/1/2007. These criteria are applied to the Gender, HireDate, Position and the
DepID fields.
Click press the button to add a new condition - this will add a new condition to the
criteria. Alternatively, you can click the Filter button and select the Add Condition
popup menu item.
See also:
Invoking the Filter Builder
dialog


Adding a new group
7.3.3 Setting filter criteria

As we need to apply the filter criteria to the HireDate field, we click the column box (next
to the ellipsis button) to open the drop-down list displaying the available column
names and select the HireDate item.
See also:
dialog
Adding a new group

7.3.4 Setting filter operator

Since we need the list of employees hired after 10/1/2007, we need to select the IS
GREATER THAN operator from the corresponding drop-down list.
See also:
dialog
Adding a new group
7.3.5 Setting filter criteria values

Next, we need to specify value '10/1/2007' for the IS GREATER THAN operator.
Similarly, if, for example, we need to get the list of employees hired during the 9/1/2007
- 10/1/2007 term, we set the BETWEEN filter operator (this will add two empty value
boxes to specify the inclusive range for the BETWEEN condition) and specify the range for
the operator, i.e. the '9/1/2007' and the '10/1/2007' values in the corresponding value
boxes.

It is possible to set the date value manually by typing it in, or via the date editor which
is activated when you click the value box.
Editors used in value boxes are determined by the data type assigned to the
corresponding columns.
See also:
dialog
Adding a new group
7.3.6 Adding a new group

Since we also need to get the list of male specialists-engineers (i.e. those registered in
the Engineering and Tool Design departments and having an engineering-oriented
position), we can add a complex filter condition combining simple conditions with the
AND operator. (However, in this particular case we can just add them on the same root

level as for the existing condition).
If you need to add a group of conditions, click the ellipsis button for the HIRE_DATE
condition and select the Add Group popup menu item.
See also:
dialog
7.3.7 Setting group operator

Conditions of complex criteria can be combined with any of the four logical operators
used: AND, OR, NOT AND, NOT OR.
In our case it is enough to click the group operator box and select the AND item from
the drop-down menu.

See also:
dialog
Adding a new group
7.3.8 Applying filter conditions

Suppose we have created a condition within the new group. If we need, we can add more
conditions at the same level and specify the required values using the value boxes. When
the operation is completed, the Filter Builder dialog will look like in the screenshot
below.
Click the Apply button to see the result of the filtering you have made, and click OK or
Cancel to close the dialog with or without saving your filter conditions respectively.

The Filter Builder dialog allows you to save filter criteria to and load them from external
files. Clicking the Save As… or the Open… buttons activates the corresponding dialogs.
Filter settings are stored in *.flt files.
Please be informed that a column in the file is referenced by its position within a view,
hence filter settings cannot be correctly restored if columns have been deleted from the
view after saving the filter to a file.
See also:
dialog
Adding a new group

Part
VIII
8 Import/Export Tools
Using SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird you are provided with powerful tools to
import and export data to/from your InterBase/Firebird database.
· Export Data Wizard
Exports data to various supported formats including MS Excel, MS Access, RTF, HTML,
PDF, CSV, XML, MS Excel 2007 and more.
· Import Data Wizard
Imports data from any of supported formats: MS Excel, MS Access, DBF, TXT, CSV, XML
, MS Excel 2007, MS Word 2007 and more.
· Export Data as SQL Script
Exports data to an SQL script as a number of INSERT statements.
· Using templates
Facilitates using import/export wizards.
See also:
Getting started
Database Explorer
Database management
Data management
Database tools
Server tools
Personalization
External tools

8.1 Export Data Wizard

Export Data Wizard allows you to export data from a table / view or from a query
result to any of supported formats (MS Excel, MS Access, MS Word, RTF, HTML, PDF, TXT
, CSV, XML, DBF, MS Excel 2007, MS Word 2007, etc.). You can save your settings as a
template any time for future use.
To start the wizard, right-click the object in DB Explorer, select the Data Manipulation
context menu group and proceed to the Export Data... item within this group.
Alternatively, you can open the Data tab of Table Editor / View Editor or the Result(s)
tab of SQL Editor / Query Builder, right-click the grid there, then select the Data
Manipulation context menu group and proceed to the Export Data of
<object_name>... item within this group, or use the Export Data item of the
Navigation bar.
· Setting name and format for the destination file

· Selecting fields for export
· Adjusting formats applied to exported data
· Setting header and footer text for the destination file
· Setting format-specific options
· Setting common export options
· Exporting data
· Using templates
See also:
Import Data Wizard
Export as SQL Script
8.1.1 Setting destination file name and format

This step of the wizard allows you to select the destination file format you need to export
data into.
Destination file name

Type in or use the button to specify the path to the file using the Save as... dialog.
The file name extension changes automatically according to the selected Destination
format.

Destination format
Specify the format of the destination file. For details refer to Supported file formats.
Click the Next button to proceed to the Selecting fields for export step of the wizard.
8.1.2 Selecting fields for export

This step of the wizard allows you to select the table field(s) to be exported.
To select a field, you need to move it from the Available fields list to the Selected
fields list. Use the buttons or drag-and-drop operations to move the fields
from one list to another.

If you leave all the fields in the Available fields list, all fields of the table (except
BLOBs) will be exported.
Allow captions
Check this option if you need to export the field captions as well.
Click the Next button to proceed to the Adjusting data formats step of the wizard.
8.1.3 Adjusting data formats

This step allows you to customize formats applied to exported data. Edit the format
masks to adjust the result format in the way you need: Integer, Float, Date, Time,
DateTime, Currency, Boolean True, Boolean False, NULL string, Decimal separator,
Thousand separator, Date separator, Time separator.
For more details refer to Format specifiers.

Click the Next button to proceed to the Setting header and footer step of the wizard.
8.1.4 Setting header and footer

Set Header text and Footer text for the result file. This text will appear at the
beginning and at the end of the result file respectively.

Click the Next button to proceed to Setting format-specific options.
8.1.5 Setting format-specific options

This step of the wizard allows you to customize Format-specific options:
· Excel Options
· Access Options
· Word / RTF Options
· HTML Options
· PDF Options
· TXT Options
· CSV Options
· XML Options
· MS Excel 2007 options
· MS Word 2007 options
· ODF options
To get more information about the file formats, see the Supported file formats page.

8.1.5.1 Excel options
This step allows you to set options for the target MS Excel (*.xls) file.
You can customize Data format, Extensions and set Advanced options available within
the corresponding tabs:
· Data format
· Extensions
· Advanced
When you are done, click the Next button to proceed to Setting common export options.
8.1.5.1.1 Data format
The Data Format tab contains general options which allow you to adjust the format for
each kind of Excel cells. This means that you can specify such parameters as font,
borders, filling color and method, etc. for each entity (such as data field, header, footer,
caption, data, hyperlink and so on) separately. Also it is possible to create styles to make
the target Excel file striped by columns or rows.
· Fields
· Options
· Styles

For your convenience the previews illustrating the changes are displayed in the Sample
Group area on each page of Data Format tab.
8.1.5.1.1.1 Fields
Using the Fields tab you can set font options, border and fill options and select and
aggregate functions for all the fields you want to export.
You can reset the changes any time using the Reset Item and the Reset All buttons.
8.1.5.1.1.2 Options
Using the Options tab you can set font options, border and fill options for all elements
of the Excel sheet (header, caption, footer, aggregates and hyperlinks).

8.1.5.1.1.3 Styles
Using the Styles tab you can make a style template: set font options, border and fill
options and save them.
If you have created or loaded more than one style template, they can be ignored, or
used column-by-column or row-by-row (it depends on the Strip type selection).

8.1.5.1.2 Extensions
The Extensions tab provides an ability to add hyperlinks and notes and to any cell of
target file, to specify a value of a cell, to create a chart and to merge cells.
Click the Plus button to add an element;

click the Minus button to delete an element.
· Hyperlinks
· Notes
· Charts
· Cells
· Merged Cells
8.1.5.1.2.1 Hyperlinks
If you need to create a hyperlink:

· set the cell coordinates (Col and Row);
· specify whether this is a local link or URL;
· enter the title of the hyperlink;
· specify the target file location or address.

8.1.5.1.2.2 Notes
If you need to create a note:

· enter text of a note for the cell;
· set the font and fill properties using the corresponding tabs.
8.1.5.1.2.3 Charts
If you need to create a chart:

· enter the chart title;
· select the chart style (Column, Column 3D, Bar, Bar 3D, Line, Line Mark, Line 3D,
etc.);
· set the legend position: Bottom, Top, Left, Corner or Right;
· specify if you want to show the legend;
· specify if you want to set the chart color automatically;
· define the chart position and category labels using the corresponding tabs.

If you need to add series for the chart:

· add one or more series using the button;
· enter the titles;
· set data ranges (select a column from the drop-down list or set the custom range);
· define colors for all the graphs.
8.1.5.1.2.4 Cells
If you need to add a value in a specific cell:

· select the cell type: Boolean, DateTime, Numeric or String;
· enter a value;

· if you are adding a numeric or a date/time value, you can set the cell format;
· set the font, borders and fill properties using the corresponding tabs.
8.1.5.1.2.5 Merged Cells
If you want to merge two or more cells, set the range of cell coordinates: First col, Last
col, First row, Last row.
8.1.5.1.3 Advanced
The Advanced tab allows you to set a number of advanced options to be applied to the
result MS Excel file.

Page header
If necessary, enter some text for the page header.
Page footer
If necessary, enter some text for the page footer.
Sheet title
Specify the sheet title for the target file.
Page background
If necessary, use the Ellipsis button to browse for a graphical file to be applied as the
page background.
Calculate column width automatically

This option allows the wizard to determine column width in the target file automatically.
8.1.5.2 Access options
This step allows you to set options for the target MS Access (*.mdb) file.
Set the name for the target table and specify whether the wizard should create a new
table in the MS Access database if it does not exist yet, or use the existing table to
export data into.

8.1.5.3 Word / RTF options
This step allows you to set options for the target MS Word (*.doc) and Rich Text
Format (*.rtf) files.
· Base Styles
· Strip Styles
Group area within the Base Styles and the Strip Styles tabs.

8.1.5.3.1 Base Styles
The Base Styles tab contains the list of target file entities: HEADER, CAPTION, DATA,
FOOTER. You can customize style options, such as font and size, background and
foreground colors, text alignment, etc. for each of them by clicking the corresponding
item in the list and setting the options in the right-side panel. You can also switch page
orientation for the target Word/RTF file using this tab.

8.1.5.3.2 Strip Styles
Using the Strip Styles tab you can create a style template: set font, size, background
and foreground colors, text alignment, highlight and save them.

8.1.5.4 HTML options
This step allows you to set options for the target HTML (*.html) file.
· Preview
· Basic
· Multi-file
· Advanced
8.1.5.4.1 Preview
The Preview tab allows you to customize the style that will be applied to the target
HTML file using a number of built-in templates provided in the Templates combo-box.
You can select any of these templates and customize it by clicking objects in the preview
panel, and save the settings as a custom template using the Save template... button.
Use the Load template... button to load a previously saved custom template from your
hard disk. Click on an element of the table to select a color.

8.1.5.4.2 Basic
The Basic tab allows you to specify the basic parameters of target HTML file:
· specify the title of the result file;
· select whether the cascade style sheet (CSS) should be internal or external (the
Ellipsis button to browse for a *.css file);
· determine whether boolean fields of the table should be exported as HTML check
boxes.

8.1.5.4.3 Multi-file
The Multi-file tab provides you with an ability to split the target HTML file into several
separated files. This tab allows you to specify the record count for a single file, set an
option to generate an index HTML file, and add an ability to navigate between the
exported files.
8.1.5.4.4 Advanced
The Advanced tab allows you to set a number of advanced options to be applied to the
result HTML file.
Page header
Use the drop-down menu to select the font that will be used in the result file by default.
Background
If necessary, use the Ellipsis button to browse for a graphical file to be applied as the
page background.
You can also set a number of common Table options: cell padding, cell spacing, border,
background.

It is also possible to define advanced attributes for both the HTML body and table.
8.1.5.5 PDF options
This step allows you to set options for the target PDF (*.pdf) file.
Fonts
This group of options allows you to customize fonts for the header, caption, data, footer
of the result file.
Group area.
Additionally you can customize the page options (page size, width, height, etc.), page
margins and Grid options of the result PDF file.

8.1.5.6 TXT options
This step allows you to set options for the target text (*.txt) file.
Set the Calculate column width option on if you want each column of the target file to
be adjusted to the maximum number of characters in it. The Spacing option specifies
the number of spaces between columns in the target file.

8.1.5.7 CSV options
This step allows you to set options for the target CSV (*.csv) file.
Quote strings
Check this option to apply quoting for string values in the target file.
Specify the column separator using the Comma drop-down list and the preferable quote
character using the Quote drop-down list.

8.1.5.8 XML options
This step allows you to set options for the target XML (*.xml) file.
Specify XML document encoding in the Encoding edit box and set the Standalone
option on if you intend to create a standalone document.
XML type
Select the type of the result XML document: Datapacket 2.0 or Access.
Conversion between generic XML documents and documents of the XML-Datapacket
(CDS) format can be performed with the help of XML Mapper by Borland®.

8.1.5.9 MS Excel 2007 options
This step allows you to set options for the target MS Excel 2007 (*.xlsx) file.
Using the Base Styles tab you can set font and border options for all elements of the
Excel 2007 sheet (HEADER, CAPTION, DATA, FOOTER). You can customize style options,
such as font and size, background and foreground colors, text alignment, etc. for each of
them by clicking the corresponding item in the list and setting the options in the
right-side panel.
If necessary, you can also specify the sheet name for the target Excel 2007 file.

color, text alignment, wrap text options and save them.

8.1.5.10 MS Word 2007 options
This step allows you to set options for the target MS Word 2007 (*.docx) file.
Using the Base Styles tab you can set font options for all elements of the Word 2007
document (HEADER, CAPTION, DATA, FOOTER). You can customize style options, such
as font and size, background and foreground colors, text alignment, text highlight, etc.
for each of them by clicking the corresponding item in the list and setting the options in
the right-side panel.

color, text alignment, highlight options and save them.

Using the Border tab you can enable borders in the result Word 2007 document and
customize them.
Click the Border Color icon to select a color using the Color dialog where you can
specify the required color from the palette.
Border Style
Use the drop-down list to select the preferable style to applied to the border: single, thick
, double, hairline, dot, etc.

8.1.5.11 ODF options
This step allows you to set options for the target ODF Spreadsheets (*.ods) and ODF
text (*.odt) files.
Using the Base Styles tab you can set font options for all elements of the ODF
document (HEADER, CAPTION, DATA, FOOTER). You can customize style options, such
as font and size, background and foreground colors, text alignment, highlight, etc. for
each of them by clicking the corresponding item in the list and setting the options in the
right-side panel.
If necessary, you can also specify the table name for the target ODF file.
color, text alignment, highlight options and save them.

Using the Border tab you can enable borders in the result ODF document and customize
them.
Click the Border Color icon to select a color using the Color dialog where you can
specify the required color from the palette.
Border Width
Set a numeric value to indicate the width of the border.

8.1.6 Setting common export options

Use this step of the wizard to set common export options. The detailed description of
these options is given below.
Export empty tables

If checked, you can export the table even if it does not contain any data.
Skip ... record(s)

Specifies the number of records to be skipped before export starts.
Export all records

Specifies that all records of the table will be exported.
Export only ... record(s)

Specifies the number of records to be exported.
Open files after export

If this option is checked, the result file will be opened with the currently associated
program after the export operation is completed.
Print files after export

If this option is checked, the result file will be sent to the default printer after the export
operation is completed.
When you are done, click the Next button to proceed to the last step of the wizard.
8.1.7 Exporting data

This step of the wizard is intended to inform you that all export options have been set,
and you can start the export process.
Close the Wizard after successful completion

If this option is selected, the wizard is closed automatically when the export process is
completed.
If necessary, you can save a template for future use.
Click the Finish button to start the export process.


8.2 Import Data Wizard

Import Data Wizard allows you to import data to a table / view from any of supported
formats (MS Excel, MS Access, DBF, XML, TXT, CSV, HTML, MS Excel 2007, MS Word
2007, ODF). You can save your settings as a template any time for future use.
To start the wizard, right-click the table/view in DB Explorer, select the Data
Manipulation context menu group and proceed to the Import Data... item within this
group.
Alternatively, you can open the Data tab of Table Editor / View Editor, right-click the grid
there, then select the Data Manipulation context menu group and proceed to the
Import Data to <object_name>... item within this group, or use the Import Data
item of the Navigation bar.
· Setting source file name and format

· Selecting the source to import data from
· Setting correspondence between the source and target fields
· Adjusting common data formats
· Setting advanced field formats
· Setting import mode and data write type
· Customizing common import options
· Importing data
· Using templates
See also:
Export Data Wizard
Export as SQL Script
8.2.1 Selecting source file name and format

This step of the wizard allows you to select the source file format you need to import
data from.
Source file name

Type in or use the button to specify the path to the file using the Open file... dialog.
The file name extension changes automatically according to the selected Import Type.

Import Type
Specify the format of the source file. For details refer to Supported file formats.
CSV format parameters

For CSV import you should define Delimiter and Quote settings using the corresponding
drop-down lists.
Click the Next button to proceed to the Setting fields correspondence step or to the
Selecting data source step of the wizard if you have selected MS Access as the source
file format.
8.2.2 Selecting data source

This step of the wizard is only available when you are importing data from MS Access.
Select a table from the table list or input a query in the corresponding text boxes to
specify the data source.
If you choose a query as the data source, you also can load a SQL query from a *.sql file

or save the current query text to a file using the Load from File... and the Save to
File... buttons correspondingly.
Click the Next button to proceed to the Setting fields correspondence step of the wizard.
8.2.3 Setting fields correspondence

This step of the wizard allows you to set correspondence between columns of the
source file and fields of the target InterBase/Firebird table.
· MS Excel
· MS Access
· DBF
· XML Datapacket
· TXT
· CSV
· HTML
· XML Generic
· MS Excel/Word 2007, ODF
To get more information about the file formats, see the Supported file formats page.

8.2.3.1 Excel
Specify ranges in the grid for the target and source fields:
· select a field of the target InterBase/Firebird table in the Fields list;
· proceed to the Sheet grid: click a column caption to select the whole column or click
the row number to select the whole row;
· the selected column/row of the source file gets green highlight, and a new range
indicating the source and target fields correspondence appears in the Ranges list;
· repeat the operation for all the fields you need to be included in the import process.
If the source Excel file and the destination InterBase/Firebird table have the same order
of columns or rows, you can use the Auto Fill Cols or the Auto Fill Rows buttons
to set correspondence between them automatically.
If necessary, you can choose to skip a defined number of the source file columns and/or
rows using the Col(s) and Row(s) spin-edits.
To clear ranges for a field, select the field in the Fields list and press the Clear
Ranges button.
To clear all ranges specified for the target table fields, press the Clear All button.
Right-click a range in the Ranges list to call its popup menu. Using the popup menu you
can add or edit ranges manually, as well as remove them or change their order.
8.2.3.2 Access
Set correspondence between the source MS Access fields and the target
InterBase/Firebird table fields:

· select a field of the target InterBase/Firebird table in the Destination Fields list;
· select the corresponding field of the source MS Access table in the Source Fields
list;
· click the Add button to set correspondence between the selected fields;
· the pair of fields appears in the list below;
Use the Auto Fill button to set correspondence between the source and target fields
automatically on the basis of their order.
To remove a correspondence, select the pair of fields in the list below and press the
Remove button.
To remove all correspondences, press the Clear button.
8.2.3.3 DBF
Set correspondence between the source DBF columns and the target InterBase/Firebird
table fields:
· select the corresponding column of the source DBF table in the Source Fields list;
Skip deleted records

Use the option to exclude records marked as deleted.
Remove button.
8.2.3.4 XML Datapacket
Set correspondence between the source XML columns and the target InterBase/Firebird
table fields:
· select the corresponding column of the source XML table in the Source Fields list;

Remove button.
8.2.3.5 TXT
Set correspondence between the source text file columns and the target
· double-click in the text viewer area to add vertical separators delimiting the source
column bounds;
· click the area between the separators to assign the column to the selected target
table field - the selected source column gets black highlight;
If necessary, you can choose to skip a defined number of the source file lines using the
Skip Lines spin-edit.

To clear all correspondences, press the Clear button.
Note: if you cannot see the content of the source text file properly, you should select the
appropriate Charset to be used for processing data.
8.2.3.6 CSV
Set correspondence between the target table fields and the source CSV file columns:
· proceed to the source grid viewer area: click a caption to assign the column to the
selected target table field;
· the selected column of the source file gets gray highlight;
If the source CSV file and the destination InterBase/Firebird table have the same order of
columns, you can use the Auto Fill button to set correspondence between them
automatically.
Note that the CSV delimiter is specified at the Selecting source file name and format step
of the wizard.
If necessary, you can choose to skip a defined number of the source file rows using the
Skip spin-edits.

To remove a correspondence, select the field in the Fields list and press the Clear
button.
8.2.3.7 HTML
Set correspondence between the target table fields and the source HTML file columns:
· proceed to the source grid viewer area: click a column to assign the column to the
If the source HTML file and the destination InterBase/Firebird table have the same order
of columns, you can use the Auto Fill button to set correspondence between them
automatically.
Skip spin-edit.

button.
To remove all correspondences, press the Clear All button.
8.2.3.8 XML Generic
In order to set mapping of a Generic XML document, you should enter the relative XPath
(the path must be specified in the XPath format). Press the Fill Grid button to get the
grid filled with text and attribute values of the selected node.
Note: if the source XML document contains huge amount of data, building the tree may
take a long time.
Set correspondence between the source XML file columns and the target
· proceed to the source grid viewer area: click a column to assign the column to the
You can use the Auto Fill button to set correspondence between the source and target
fields automatically according to their order (mapping is started from the first attribute
value in this case).
If necessary, you can choose to skip a defined number of the source file lines using the
Skip spin-edit.

button.
8.2.3.9 MS Excel/Word 2007, ODF
Specify ranges in the grid for the target and source fields:
· proceed to the Sheet grid: click a column to assign the column to the selected target
table field;
If the source file and the destination InterBase/Firebird table have the same order of
columns, you can use the Auto Fill button to set correspondence between them
automatically.
Skip spin-edit.

button.
8.2.4 Adjusting data formats

This step of the wizard provides a number of options for setting common formats for all
imported data:
Date & Time formats: Short date, Long date, Short time, Long time;
Separators: Decimal, Thousand, Date, Time;
Boolean True;
Boolean False;
NULL values.
For more information refer to the Format specifiers page.

Click the Next button to proceed to the Setting advanced field formats step of the
wizard.
8.2.5 Setting advanced field formats

This step of the wizard allows you to set formats each field separately.
Select a field in the list and adjust format options that will be applied to this field only:
generator value, generator step, constant value, NULL value, default value, left/right
quotation, character case, character set.

The Replacements area allows you to set the text you need to be replaced during data
import into the selected field. Press the Plus button to specify a new replacement
options using the Add Replacement dialog.
When you are done, click the Next button to proceed to the Setting import mode step of
the wizard.

8.2.6 Setting import mode

This step of the wizard allows you to define the records processing mode as Insert All,
Insert New, Update, Update or Insert, Delete, Delete or Insert mode:
· Insert all: all records from the source file are inserted into the tables irrespective of
whether any records exist in the destination table or not
· Insert new: already existing records are skipped, and new records are inserted into
the destination table
· Update: all existing records are updated from the source file
· Update or insert: already existing records are updated and new records are inserted
into the destination table
· Delete: already existing records are deleted
· Delete or insert: existing records are deleted and new records are inserted into the
destination table
Here is an example of some import modes offered by Import Data Wizard:
All import modes (except for the Insert All mode) are based on primary key values
information. In order to perform import operations with these modes used you need to
have matches between the source file primary key column(s) and the destination table
primary key column(s).
For example, your source file contains three rows with the primary key values 1, 2, 3,
but your destination table contains only two rows with the primary key values 1, 2.
If you use the Update import mode, then the rows with key values 1, 2 will be updated.
If you use the Update or insert import mode, then rows 1, 2 will be updated and the
row with key value 3 will be inserted.
If you use the Insert new import mode, in this case only the row with key value 3 will
be inserted into the destination table.
It is applied to all other import modes, except for the Insert all mode. For all these
modes (except for the Insert all mode) it is obligatory to select the primary key fields.
This field (or fields) is used as key field to identify specific data in the target database.
The key columns for these operations are defined in the Key columns area.

Use Import mode to select whether to insert all records, or to update/delete existing
ones. Note that for updating/deleting existing records in the target table you should
move its key columns from the Available columns list to the Selected columns list.
The Key columns area allows you to select the fields of the table to be used as the key
fields for the import process.
To select a field, you need to move it from the Available columns list to the Selected
columns list. Use the buttons or drag-and-drop operations to move the
fields from one list to another.
Click the Next button to proceed to the Customizing common options step.
8.2.7 Customizing common options

Use this step of the wizard to set common import options. The detailed description of
these options is given below.

Commit
Commit when done

Commits the transaction when all records are imported.
Commit after each block

Inserts the COMMIT statement after a defined number of records.
Commit changes manually

Select this option if you intend to commit the transaction manually.
Block size
Use the spin-edit box to define the number of records in each committed block.
Record count
Import all records

Specifies that all records of the source file will be imported.
Import only ... record(s)

Specifies the number of records to be imported.

When you are done, click the Next button to proceed to the last step of the wizard.
8.2.8 Importing data

This step of the wizard is intended to inform you that all import options have been set,
and you can start the import process.

If this option is selected, the wizard is closed automatically when the import process is
completed.
Click the Finish button to start the import process.

8.3 Export as SQL Script

Export as SQL Script Wizard allows you to export data from a table / view or from a
query result to SQL script as a number of INSERT statements. You can save your settings
as a template any time for future use.
To start the wizard, right-click the object in DB Explorer, select the Data Manipulation
context menu group and proceed to the Export Data as SQL Script... item within this
group.
Alternatively, you can open the Data tab of Table Editor / View Editor or the Result(s)
tab of SQL Editor / Query Builder, right-click the grid there, then select the Data
Manipulation context menu group and proceed to the Export <object_name> as SQL
Script... item within this group, or use the Export as SQL Script item of the Navigation
bar.
· Defining the type of destination server

· Setting destination file name
· Setting BLOB options
· Selecting field to export
· Editing the result table definition
· Setting export options
· Exporting as SQL Script
· Using templates
See also:
Export Data Wizard
Import Data Wizard
8.3.1 Defining the type of destination server

This step of the wizard allows you to define the type of destination server you need to
export data for. The result script will be generated in compliance with the specifications
of the selected server type:
DB2
InterBase/Firebird
Microsoft® SQL Server™
MySQL
Oracle
PostgreSQL

Add CREATE TABLE statement

Check this option to add the CREATE TABLE statement to the result script.
Click the Next button to proceed to the Setting destination file name step of the wizard.
8.3.2 Setting destination file name

Specify whether the result script will be loaded to SQL Script Editor or saved to a file.
File name
Type in or use the button to specify the path to the file and the file name.
If necessary, select the File charset using the corresponding drop-down list.
Enter the Table name and the Schema name to be included in the result SQL script.

Click the Next button to proceed to the Setting BLOB options step of the wizard.
8.3.3 Setting BLOB options

BLOB and arrays options
In this group of options you can determine whether BLOB fields are not to be extracted,
extracted as strings, or extracted into a separate file. If the latter is selected, you also
need to specify the File name (the *.blo file where the BLOB data will be stored) and the
location of the file on your local machine using the button.
Compress file
Check this option if you wish to compress the file containing BLOB data.
Compression
Define the desired compression level to be applied for the file: None, Fastest, Default,
Best.

Click the Next button to proceed to the Selecting fields to export step of the wizard.
8.3.4 Selecting fields to export

This step of the wizard allows you to select the table field(s) to be exported to SQL script.
To select a field, you need to move it from the Available fields list to the Selected
fields list. Use the buttons or drag-and-drop operations to move the fields

Click the Next button to proceed to the Editing table definition step of the wizard.
8.3.5 Editing table definition

This step is available only if the Add CREATE TABLE statement option was checked on
the Setting destination file name step of the wizard. It allows you to edit the SQL script
for creating the table.

Click the Next button to proceed to the Setting export options step of the wizard.
8.3.6 Setting export options

Specify common export options according to your needs.
If necessary, you can choose to replace non-print characters in strings with spaces.
Records in block
Use the spin-edit box to define the number of records in each committed block.
Insert COMMIT after each block

Check this option to add the COMMIT statement after a defined number of records.

Click the Next button to proceed to Exporting as SQL Script.
8.3.7 Exporting as SQL Script

This step of the wizard is intended to inform you that all export options have been set,
and you can start the export as SQL script process.
Load generated script into Script Editor

Check this option to load the result script to SQL Script Editor.

If this option is selected, the wizard is closed automatically when the export process is
completed.
The Operations tab allows you to view the log of operations and errors (if any).

Click the Finish button to start the export as SQL script process.

Part
IX
9 Database tools
SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird provides a number of powerful tools that allow
you to perform various operations over your databases.
· Common DB Tools
· Specific DB Tools
See also:
Getting started
Database Explorer
Database management
Data management
Import/Export tools
Personalization
External tools

9.1 Common DB Tools

The following common database tools are available in SQL Manager 2008 for
InterBase/Firebird:
· Dependency Tree
Allows you to view all the object dependencies in one diagram.
· Visual Database Designer
Allows you to lay out your database schema visually.
· SQL Script Editor
Executes SQL scripts in the database.
· Extract Database Wizard
Extracts the table metadata and/or data to an SQL script which can be executed later
on another machine to restore the database structure and/or data.
· Print Metadata
Creates powerful metadata reports in the WYSIWYG mode ready for printing.
· HTML Report
Creates powerful metadata reports in the HTML format.
· Report Designer
Allows you to build and print database reports.
· SQL Monitor
Displays all the SQL statements executed while working in SQL Manager 2008 for
InterBase/Firebird.
· Using templates
Facilitates using SQL Manager wizards.
See also:
Specific database tools
9.1.1 Dependency Tree

The Dependency Tree tool allows you to view all the object dependencies in one
diagram.
To call the Dependency Tree window, select the Tools | Dependency Tree menu
item, or use the Dependency Tree button on the main toolbar.
To view dependencies of an object, click the Select object Navigation bar item. Then
select the required object in the Select Object dialog window. The dependency tree will
appear in the main area of the window.

The root object is marked out with a blue frame.
The objects that the root object depends on are situated to the left of the root object.
The objects that depend on the root object are situated to the right of the root object.
You can switch between objects by selecting them in the diagram. The selected object
becomes the root object.
To show/hide subobjects click the Show Subobjects / Hide Subobjects link on the
Navigation bar.

The history of selected root objects is available: you can move back and forward through
this history using the Previous object and the Next object links on the Navigation bar.
See also:
Visual Database Designer
SQL Script Editor
Extract Database Wizard
Print Metadata
HTML Report Wizard
Reports management
SQL Monitor
The Navigation bar of the Dependency Tree window allows you to:
· select the database;
· refresh the currently displayed dependency tree;
· print the diagram;
· set printing options using the Print Setup dialog;
· save the current diagram as a picture;
· open InterBase/Firebird help file;

· restore the default size of the window;

· navigate within selected objects;
· show/hide subobjects;
· select an object.
See also:
Dependency Tree
9.1.2 Visual Database Designer

Visual Database Designer is provided for designing your database visually. It allows
you to create, edit and drop tables and table fields, set relations between tables and
perform other operations you may need to achieve your purpose.
To open the designer, select the Tools | Visual Database Designer main menu item,
or use the VDBD button on the main toolbar.

· Diagram navigator
· Adding objects to diagram
· Removing objects from diagram
· Creating new table
· Creating relationships
· Working with multiple pages
· Reverse engineering
· Printing diagram
· Saving/Loading diagram
· Setting diagram options

See also:
Dependency Tree
SQL Script Editor
Print Metadata
HTML Report Wizard
Reports management
SQL Monitor
9.1.2.1 Using Navigation bar and context menu
The Navigation bar of Visual Database Designer allows you to:

· select the database for the diagram;
· edit diagram options;
· use Diagram Navigator;
· add objects to the diagram using the Database Objects group.

The context menu of Visual Database Designer allows you to:

· select all objects in the diagram area;
· adjust diagram zoom for optimal representation;
· create a new table;
· create a new relation;
· create a comment;
· configure the grid;
· adjust the diagram style;
· perform Reverse Engineering;

· extract metadata of the diagram objects to SQL Script Editor;

· view/edit diagram options.
See also:
Diagram Navigator
Adding objects to diagram
Removing objects from
diagram
Creating new table
Creating relationships
Working with multiple pages
Reverse engineering
Printing diagram
Saving/Loading diagram
Setting diagram options
9.1.2.2 Diagram Navigator
To navigate within the large diagram, use the Navigator tool on the Navigation bar. It
allows you to see the whole diagram in a reduced size and even to move the objects in
the diagram.
The area currently visible in the main diagram area is outlined in red color.

See also:
diagram
Creating new table
Reverse engineering
Printing diagram
9.1.2.3 Adding objects to diagram
To add an object to the diagram, drag it from the Database Objects group on the
Navigation bar into the desired place on the diagram or simply double-click this object.

See also:
Diagram Navigator
diagram
Creating new table
Reverse engineering
Printing diagram
9.1.2.4 Removing objects from diagram
To remove an object(s) from the diagram, select it, then right-click its title and choose
the Remove <object_name> menu item or simply press the Del key.
See also:


Diagram Navigator
Creating new table
Reverse engineering
Printing diagram
9.1.2.5 Creating new table
To create a new table using Visual Database Designer:

· press the Create table button on the toolbar;
· click the desired point on the diagram to place the new table at;
· create a new table using the Table Editor.
Hint: To create a new table, you can also use the corresponding item of the context
menu.
See also:
Diagram Navigator


diagram
Reverse engineering
Printing diagram
9.1.2.6 Creating relationships
To establish a new relationship (which is the foreign key in terms of database):

· press the Create relation button on the toolbar;
· click the table where the referential constraint should be created;
· click the referred table;
· create a new foreign key using Foreign key Editor.
Hint: To create a relation, you can also use the corresponding item of the context menu.
See also:
Diagram Navigator
diagram

Creating new table

Reverse engineering
Printing diagram
9.1.2.7 Working with multiple pages
You can create several pages in one diagram to separate certain subject areas from the
database, e.g. for better comprehension.
To manage diagram pages, right-click the tabs at the bottom of the diagram area and
select the appropriate popup menu items for adding, deleting or renaming pages.
See also:
Diagram Navigator
diagram
Creating new table
Reverse engineering
Printing diagram
9.1.2.8 Reverse engineering
The reverse engineering process builds relationship diagram on the basis of the current
database's structure. The objects are arranged automatically within the diagram.

To start the reverse engineering process, press the Reverse Engineer button on the
toolbar, or use the corresponding item of the context menu.
See also:
Diagram Navigator
diagram
Creating new table
Printing diagram
9.1.2.9 Printing diagram
Visual Database Designer allows you to print and preview the diagram.
To preview the diagram:

· press the Print Preview button on the toolbar;
· preview the diagram using the Print Preview dialog.
To setup print options:

· press the Print Setup button on the toolbar, or use the corresponding link on the
Navigation bar;
· set printing options using the Print Setup dialog and press OK.
To print the diagram:

· press the Print button on the toolbar;
· set printing options using the Print Setup dialog and press the Print button.

See also:
Diagram Navigator
diagram
Creating new table
Reverse engineering
9.1.2.9.1 Print Preview dialog
The Print Preview dialog allows you to see the diagram layout in WYCIWYG mode
before it will be printed.

See also:
Print Setup dialog
9.1.2.9.2 Print Setup dialog
The Print Setup dialog of Visual Database Designer allows you to:
· choose the printer;
· specify print layout: print using defined scale factor or arrange diagram at a defined
number of pages horizontally and vertically;
· specify page options: margins, headers and footers;
· set other print options.

See also:
Print Preview dialog
9.1.2.10 Saving/Loading diagram
Use the Save Diagram and the Open Diagram buttons on the toolbar to save the
diagram for future use or to load the previously saved diagram.
See also:
Diagram Navigator
diagram
Creating new table
Reverse engineering
Printing diagram

9.1.2.11 Setting diagram options
Using this dialog you can setup the behavior and look of each diagram page. See detailed
description of each option on the Visual Database Designer page of the Environment
Options dialog.
To call this dialog, you can also use the corresponding item of the context menu.
See also:
Diagram Navigator
diagram
Creating new table


Reverse engineering
Printing diagram
9.1.3 SQL Script Editor

Using SQL Script Editor you can view, edit and execute SQL scripts.
To open SQL Script Editor, select the Tools | New SQL Script / Tools | SQL Script
main menu items or use the corresponding / toolbar buttons. You can also use the
Shift + Ctrl + S shortcut for the same purpose.
In the script area you can view and edit the SQL script text. For your convenience syntax
highlight and code completion features are implemented.
· Using Script Explorer
Note: SQL Script Editor does not show results returned upon SELECT queries
execution. Please use SQL Editor for that purpose instead.
See also:
Dependency Tree
Print Metadata
HTML Report Wizard
Reports management
SQL Monitor
The Navigation bar of SQL Script Editor allows you to:

· select the destination host and database for the script;
· execute the current script;
· execute a script from file;
· create a new script;
· load a script from an *.sql file using the Open SQL Script dialog;
· save the current script;
· save the script to an *.sql file using the Save as... dialog;
· disable parsing of SQL code;
· enable result log;
· configure SQL Script Editor within the Script Options section of the Environment

Options dialog;
· browse the objects used in the script within Script Explorer.
See also:
Using Script Explorer
9.1.3.2 Using the context menu
The context menu of SQL Script Editor area contains execution commands, most of the
standard text-processing functions (Cut, Copy, Paste, Select All) and functions for
working with the script as a whole, e.g. you can move the cursor to a particular line,

change the case of selected text, view the script properties or print the text of the script.
Each of these operations can be also performed with the corresponding hot keys used.
Implementation of the Find Text and the Replace Text dialogs contributes to more
efficient work with the SQL code.
See also:
Using Script Explorer

9.1.3.3 Using Script Explorer
The Explorer group on the Navigation bar displays the tree of objects, used in the
current script and allows you to get to the required script fragment quickly by clicking the
object in the tree.
See also:
9.1.4 Extract Database Wizard

Extract Database Wizard allows you to extract database objects and/or data to an SQL
script, e.g. for backup purposes.
To start the wizard, select the Tools | Extract Database... main menu item.
· Selecting a database for extraction
· Specifying destination file name
· Setting extraction mode
· Setting BLOB options

· Selecting objects for metadata extraction

· Selecting objects for data extraction
· Customizing script options
· Start of extraction process
· Using templates
See also:
Dependency Tree
SQL Script Editor
Print Metadata
HTML Report Wizard
Reports management
SQL Monitor
9.1.4.1 Selecting source database
This step of the wizard allows you to select the source database from which metadata
and/or data are to be extracted.
If necessary, check the Extract all metadata and data of the database option to
simplify the wizard.

Click the Next button to proceed to the Specifying destination file name step of the
wizard.
9.1.4.2 Specifying destination file name
Script destination
This group of options allows you to specify whether the result SQL script will be
automatically loaded to SQL Script Editor or saved into a file.
File name
Set a name for the result *.sql file and type in or use the Save as... button to specify
the path to this file on your local machine or on a machine in the LAN.
File charset
If necessary, use the drop-down list to select the character set to be applied to the
output file.

Depending on whether you have checked the Extract all metadata and data of the
database option at the Selecting source database step, upon pressing the Next button
you will either proceed to the next step of the wizard, or you will be immediately
forwarded to the Setting BLOB options step, and then to the Customizing script options
step of the wizard.
9.1.4.3 Setting extraction mode
This step allows you to specify the extraction mode: choose whether structure only,
data only or both are to be extracted.

Click the Next button to proceed to the Setting BLOB options step of the wizard.
9.1.4.4 Setting BLOB options
BLOB options
In this group of options you can determine whether BLOB fields are not to be extracted,
extracted as strings, or extracted into a separate file. If the latter is selected, you also
need to specify the File name (the *.blo file where the BLOB data are to be stored) and
the location of the file on your local machine using the Save as... button.
Compress file
Check this option if you wish to compress the file containing BLOB data.
Compression
Define the desired compression level to be applied for the file: None, Fastest, Default,
Best.

Click the Next button to proceed to Selecting objects for structure extraction.
9.1.4.5 Selecting objects for structure extraction
This step of the wizard allows you to select objects for metadata extraction.
Note that this step is only available if the Extract all metadata and data of the
database option was unchecked when selecting the source database.
Extract all objects

Adds all objects of the database to structure extraction process.
Extract all objects of schema...

Adds all objects of a schema to structure extraction process.
Schema name
Use the drop-down list to select the schema to extract all objects from.
Extract selected objects

Adds only selected objects to structure extraction process.

Objects to extract
Use the drop-down list to select the type of objects to be extracted.
To select an object, you need to move it from the Available list to the Selected list. Use
the buttons or drag-and-drop operations to move the objects from one list
to another.
Click the Next button to proceed to Selecting objects for data extraction.
9.1.4.6 Selecting objects for data extraction
This step of the wizard allows you to select tables for data extraction.
Note that this step is only available if the Extract all metadata and data of the
database option was unchecked when selecting the source database.
Extract data of the selected tables

Adds only selected tables to data extraction process.
To select a table, you need to move it from the Available list to the Selected list. Use
the buttons or drag-and-drop operations to move the tables from one list
to another.

Extract data of all tables

Adds all tables of the database to data extraction process.
Extract data of tables selected on the previous step

Adds only the tables selected for metadata extraction.
Click the Next button to proceed to the Customizing script options step of the wizard.
9.1.4.7 Customizing script options
This step allows you to customize common script options and data options for the
extraction process.
Script options
Generate "CREATE DATABASE" statement

Check this option to add the CREATE DATABASE statement to the result script.
Generate DROP statements

Check the option to add the DROP statements for the extracted objects in the result

script.
With IF statements
Check this option to add the IF keyword to the DROP statements in the result script.
Create empty procedures

This option specifies whether procedures with empty bodies are included in the result
script or not.
Extract dependent objects

This option determines objects' dependencies usage in the extraction process. Check the
option to extract all objects that the selected objects depend on.
Data options
Records in a block / Insert "COMMIT" statement after each block

These controls allow you to define whether the COMMIT statement is added to the script
or not, and to specify the number of records in each block to be supplemented with this
statement.
Abort extraction on error

This option determines whether the extraction process should be stopped or forced to
continue if an error occurs.

Click the Next button to proceed to the last step of the wizard.
9.1.4.8 Start of extraction process
This step of the wizard is intended to inform you that all extraction options have been
set, and you can start the extraction process.
Load script to Script Editor

Check this option to load the result script to SQL Script Editor.
Close the wizard after successful completion

If this option is selected, the wizard is closed automatically when the extraction process
is completed.
Click the Finish button to start the extraction process.

9.1.5 Print Metadata

Print Metadata allows you to generate and print metadata reports of any database
object(s).
To open the window, select the Tools | Print Metadata main menu item, or use the
Print Metadata button on the main toolbar.
See also:
Dependency Tree
SQL Script Editor
HTML Report Wizard
Reports management
SQL Monitor

The Navigation bar of the Print Metadata window allows you to:
· select the database for the printing report;
· print metadata of the selected object(s);
· preview the printing report;
· filter database objects by type.
See also:
Printing options
9.1.5.2 Printing options
The Print Metadata window allows you to select the database objects for printing
metadata.
To select an object, you need to move it from the Available objects list to the Objects
for printing list. Use the buttons or drag-and-drop operations to move
the objects from one list to another.

After you select one or several objects, the Printing Options pane appears at the
bottom.
Printing Options
Select an object in the Objects for printing list and specify items to be included into the
printing report: DDL, Description (for all database objects), Fields/Params, Foreign Keys,
Checks, Indexes, Triggers (for tables).
Note that you can make a preview of the printing report and print metadata for
objects of the selected type using the corresponding items of the Navigation bar.
Use the Export toolbar button to export the preview content to any of the available
formats: HTML file, Excel file, Text file, RTF file, CSV file, HTML file, BMP image, Excel
table (OLE), JPEG image, TIFF image.
See also:

9.1.6 HTML Report Wizard

HTML Report wizard allows you to generate a detailed HTML report of the selected
database objects.
To start HTML Report Wizard, select the Tools | HTML Report main menu item, or
use the HTML Report button on the main toolbar.
· Selecting database and directory
· Selecting object types
· Specifying CSS for HTML report
· Setting additional report options
· Creating HTML report
· Using templates
See also:
Dependency Tree
SQL Script Editor
Print Metadata
Reports management
SQL Monitor
9.1.6.1 Selecting database and directory
At this step of the wizard you should select the source database for the report.
Output directory
Type in or use the button to specify the path to the output directory for the result
HTML files using the Browse for Folder dialog.

Click the Next button to proceed to the Selecting object types step of the wizard.
9.1.6.2 Selecting object types
Use this step of the wizard to select the types of objects to be included in the result HTML
report.

For your convenience the Check All and Unckeck All buttons are implemented at the
bottom of the objects list area.
Click the Next button to proceed to the Specifying CSS step of the wizard.
9.1.6.3 Specifying CSS
This step of the wizard allows you to edit the CSS (Cascading Style Sheet) file that will
be used by the result HTML report.

Click the Next button to proceed to the Setting additional report options step of the
wizard.
9.1.6.4 Setting additional report options
Use this step of the wizard to set additional HTML report options.
Use the Charset drop-down list to select the preferable character set to be applied to the
result HTML report.

If necessary, you can set optional text to Report header and Report footer of the
result HTML report.
Click the Next button to proceed to Creating HTML report.
9.1.6.5 Creating HTML report
This step of the wizard is intended to inform you that all necessary options have been
set, and you can start the process.
Show report after generating

This option opens the result report in your default browser after generating.
Close the wizard after successful completion

If this option is selected, the wizard is closed automatically when the creating HTML
report process is completed.

Click the Finish button to start the process.
9.1.7 Reports management

SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird provides several tools for efficient reports
management:
· Create Report Wizard
This tool is used to simplify the process of creating reports.
· Report Designer
It is a basic tool for creating powerful reports.
· Report Viewer
Allows you to view created reports.
Reports can be stored either in the database (table xxxreports will be created to store
them) or in a folder on your hard drive specified on the Directories page of the
Database Registration Info dialog.
See also:
Dependency Tree
SQL Script Editor


Print Metadata
HTML Report Wizard
SQL Monitor
9.1.7.1 Create Report Wizard
Using Create Report Wizard you can create a report containing required datasets,
bands and fields on them, with a definite report style applied.
To start the wizard, select the Database | New Object... main menu item, then select
Report in the Create New Object dialog. Alternatively, you can right-click the Reports
node of the DB Explorer tree and select the New Report... item from the context menu.
· Specifying report name and options

· Selecting report bands
· Selecting report style
· Specifying paper settings
· Specifying margins
· Specifying other page settings
See also:
Report Designer
Report Viewer
9.1.7.1.1 Specifying database name and report options
Select the source database for adding a report and choose the action you need to
perform: either create a new report or import an existing report from file.
Set the name for the new report and specify the save options for it:
Save to database
The report will be created on the server inside the database.
Save to file
If this option is selected, the report will be saved as a *.fr3 file. Specify the path to the
report on your hard drive using the Save as... dialog.

Click the Next button to proceed to the Selecting report bands step of the wizard.
9.1.7.1.2 Selecting report bands
This step of the wizard allows you to select the bands to be included in the report.
To select a band, you need to move it from the Available Bands list to the Report
Bands list. Use the buttons or drag-and-drop operations to move the
fields from one list to another.
Use the Edit button to create datasets for 'data' bands using Query Builder.

Brief information about bands functionality is listed below. See FastReport Help for
more information.
Name Functionality
Report title Prints once at the beginning of report
Report summary Prints once at the end of report
Page header Prints at the top of each page
Page footer Prints at the bottom of each page
Master header Prints at the beginning of master list
Master data Data rows of master list
Master footer Prints at the end of master list
Detail header Prints at the beginning of detail list
Detail data Data rows of detail list
Detail footer Prints at the end of detail list
Subdetail header Prints at the beginning of subdetail list
Subdetail data Data rows of subdetail list
Subdetail footer Prints at the end of subdetail list
Group header Prints at the beginning of each group
Group footer Prints at the end of each group

Click the Next button to proceed to the Selecting report style step of the wizard.
9.1.7.1.3 Selecting report style
Select the report style by clicking one of the images illustrating the styled available for
the report.
Click the Next button to proceed to the Specifying paper settings step of the wizard.
9.1.7.1.4 Specifying paper settings
Specify report options: paper size and orientation, page margins, other settings.
Open the report after the wizard has finished

Check this option to edit the generated report with Report Designer.

Click the Next button to proceed to the Specifying margins step of the wizard.
9.1.7.1.5 Specifying margins
Stretch to print area

If this option is checked, the size of report is adjusted to the print area. If this option is
unchecked, you can specify the left, right, top and bottom margins (in millimeters).
Open the report after the wizard has finished

If this option is checked, the report will be opened after generating.

Click the Next button to proceed to the Specifying other page settings step of the
wizard.
9.1.7.1.6 Specifying other page settings
Options
Print to previous page

This option allows to use white space on a previous page. This option can be used in case
when a report template consists of several pages or when printing batch (composite)
reports.
Two-pass report
If this option is selected, report's formation will be performed in two steps. During the
first pass, a report is formed, and is divided into pages, but the result is not saved
anywhere. During the second pass a standard report formation with saving a result in the
stream is performed.
Page numbering
This option allows to print a page numbers.
Columns

Number
This parameter specifies the number of columns for multi-column reports' printing.
Gap, mm
This parameter specifies the width of the gap between columns.
When you are done, click the Finish button to start the report generation process.
9.1.7.2 Report Designer
Report Designer allows you to create and edit reports. This tool can be opened after
completion of Create Report Wizard to design a new report.
To edit an already existing project, use the appropriate Navigation bar item of Report
Viewer.
This module is provided by FastReport (http://www.fast-report.com) and has its own

help system. Press F1 key in the Report Designer to call the FastReport help.
Please find the instructions on how to create a simple report in the Report Designer
below:
· Adding dialog form
· Adding database and query components
· Adding report data

· Viewing the report

· Saving the report
Note: The Object Inspector that allows you to edit report object properties, can be
opened by pressing the F11 key.
See also:
Create Report Wizard
Report Viewer
9.1.7.2.1 Adding dialog form
To add a dialog form, select the File | New Dialog main menu item in Report Designer
.
The new dialog appears within the DialogPage1 tab of the designer. Use the available
RAD tools to add necessary interface elements to the dialog.

To call the dialog, proceed to the Code tab and supply the corresponding statement (
PascalScript), e.g.
begin
DialogPage1.ShowModal;
end.
Using the Language drop-down list you can select the script language to be used for the
event handler: PascalScript (by default), C++Script, BasicScript, JScript.
For instance, the following C++ Script code can be used as the handler for the OnClick
event of the 'Show' button to open ADOQuery:
{
ADOQuery1.Active = true;
}
See also:
Adding database and query components
Adding report data
Viewing the report
Saving the report

9.1.7.2.2 Adding database and query components
Adding database component
In order to add the Database component:

· proceed to the Data tab of Report Designer;
· pick the ADO Database component on the toolbar (on the left);
· click within the working area - the corresponding ADODatabase1 icon appears in the
area;
· set the database connection and authorization parameters using the Properties
Inspector or simply double-click the component.
Adding query component
In order to add the Query component:

· proceed to the Data tab of Report Designer;
· pick the ADO Query component on the toolbar (on the left);
· click within the working area - the corresponding ADOQuery1 icon appears in the
area;
· set the database name and authorization parameters within the Properties
Inspector;
· double-click the ADOQuery1 icon to open the SQL window;
· input the SQL query that returns the required dataset and click the button;
· repeat the operation if you wish to add other query components to the report.

Note: The Properties Inspector panel that allows you to edit report object properties
can be shown/hidden by pressing the F11 key.
Using the above given steps you can create as many queries as you need. In order to
select a dataset returned by a query, select the Report | Data... main menu item of
Report Designer to call the Select Report Datasets dialog. Pick the required query
within the dialog and press OK.
See also:
Adding dialog form
Adding report data
Viewing the report
Saving the report
9.1.7.2.3 Adding report data
Adding bands
In order to add a band to the report:

· proceed to the Page1 tab of Report Designer;

· pick the Insert Band component on the toolbar (on the left);
· select the band to be added to the report;
· click within the working area - the corresponding element appears in the area;
· set element properties within the Properties Inspector.
Note: The Properties Inspector panel that allows you to edit report object properties
can be shown/hidden by pressing the F11 key.
Adding report data
In order to add data to the report:

· proceed to the Data tab within the panel on the right side of the window;
· pick a field within the Data tree and drag it to the working area;
· add all necessary elements one by one using drag-and-drop operation for each of
them.

See also:
Adding dialog form
Viewing the report
Saving the report
9.1.7.2.4 Viewing the report
Viewing the report
To preview the newly created report, select the File | Preview main menu item or use
the corresponding Preview toolbar button. You can also use the Ctrl+P shortcut for
the same purpose. This mode allows you to view, edit and print the result report.

To print the report, use the Print toolbar button or the corresponding context menu
item.
It is also possible to preview/print the report using Report Viewer.
See also:
Adding dialog form
Adding report data
Saving the report
9.1.7.2.5 Saving the report
When all report parameters are set, you can save the report to an external *.fr3 file on
your local machine or in a machine in the LAN.
To save the report, select the File | Save main menu item or use the corresponding
Save Report toolbar button. You can also use the Ctrl+S shortcut for the same

purpose.
If necessary, you can add the report to the database using Create Report Wizard and
perform preview/print operations using Report Viewer.
See also:
Adding dialog form
Adding report data
Viewing the report
9.1.7.3 Report Viewer
Using Report Viewer you can view, edit, save and print reports.
The main report operations can be found at the Using Navigation bar page.
See also:
Create Report Wizard
Report Designer

9.1.7.3.1 Using Navigation bar
The Navigation bar of Report Viewer allows you to:

· refresh the content of the window;
· edit report using Report Designer;
· save the current report;
· save the report to a *.fr3 file using the Save as... dialog;
· print the report.
See also:
Report Viewer
9.1.8 SQL Monitor

SQL Monitor allows you to view the log of all operations performed over databases and
database objects in SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird. The content of the window
is read-only.
To open the SQL Monitor window, select the Tools | SQL Monitor main menu item, or
use the Shift+Ctrl+M shortcut.
· Working with SQL Monitor
See also:
Dependency Tree

SQL Script Editor

Print Metadata
HTML Report Wizard
Reports management
The Navigation bar of SQL Monitor allows you to:

· clear the content of the window;
· save the content to a *.txt file using the Save as... dialog;
· search for a string using the Find Text dialog;
· configure SQL Monitor using the SQL Monitor section of the Environment Options
dialog;
· always show the window on top;
· restore the default size of the window.
See also:
Working with SQL Monitor
9.1.8.2 Working with SQL Monitor
The working area of SQL Monitor lists the log of database operations and SQL queries as
items, each consisting of 3 parts: Executed (the date and time of the operation),
Operation (SQL statement), Result (the result of the operation).
Items of the context menu of SQL Monitor area provide access to various functions for
working with the window content. The context menu contains standard text-processing
functions (Copy, Select All, Undo, Redo) and functions for working with the content as a
whole, e.g. you can use bookmarks for quick navigation within the text, move the cursor
to a particular line, configure the tool using the properties item or print the content. Most
of these operations can be also performed with the corresponding hot keys used.
Implementation of the Find Text dialog contributes to more efficient work with the

content of SQL Monitor.
See also:

9.2 Specific DB Tools

SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird provides graphical interface for all database
maintenance operations. The following specific database tools are available in SQL
Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird:
· Backup Database Wizard
Creates backup copies of entire databases, transaction logs and files/filegroups.
· Restore Database Wizard
Restores entire databases, transaction logs and files/filegroups from previously created
backups.
· Database Validation
Validates the database, verifies the integrity of data structures.
· Database statistics
Retrieves the statistics on the database selected.
· Start/Stop database
Provides the ability to turn a database to a single-user mode and switch a database
back online.
· Using templates
Facilitates using SQL Manager wizards.
To obtain detailed information concerning specific SQL Server database maintenance

services, refer to the official Server™ documentation.
See also:
Common database tools
9.2.1 Backup database

This service allows you to create reserve copies of your databases.
To open the Backup Database Wizard select the Services | Backup Database menu
item.
See also:
Restore Database
Specific DB Tools
Using templates

Availability:
Windows Lite No
9.2.1.1 Selecting database to backup
On the first step you are to specify source database the backup type.
Database
Select database for backup from the drop-down list.
Backup type

Full backup
In this case all the data containing in the database are copied.
Incremental Backup (online dump) feature is a physical backup mechanism. It backs

up the physical pages of the database to "dump" files. The incremental backup feature
ensures that the output dump files represent the on-disk state of the database as of the
instant the online dump was started, so transaction and page consistency are maintained
in the process.
Note that incremental backup is only available in InterBase 2007 and Firebird 2.1 (for
Firebird 2.1 you need set the incremental backup level at the appropriate field).
Backup file name

Set the result file name (disabled when the incremental backup is selected in Backup
type).
You also must specify User name and Password in the corresponding boxes.
Optionally you may specify whether the database should be shut down before start and
brought online after the service is finished. For more details see Start/Stop Database.
Execution mode
The group defines whether services or local utilities (FB) will be used to perform backup.
Store mode
You can choose your backup to be stored locally.

9.2.1.2 Setting backup options
This step allows you to set basic options for backuping the database.
Ignore check sum

If this option is checked, wrong check sums of the database header pages, where the
database connection properties are stored, are ignored in backup.
Ignore transaction in Limbo

If this option is checked, transactions in limbo, i.e. transactions, that can't be defined as
executed or aborted, are ignored in backup.
Backup Metadata only

If this option is checked, only database metadata are saved.
Garbage collection

If this option is checked, garbage collection is executed in backup.
Old metadata description

If this option is checked, old metadata descriptions are included into the reserve
database.
Convert to Tables
This option converts the database data to tables in backup.
Format
Select the data format for the reserve database (make a transportable backup to move a
database from one OS to another).
When you are done, you can return to the previous page by clicking Back or start the
process by clicking Finish at the next step. Progress results page will be activated, where
the course of the progress will be displayed.

9.2.2 Restore database

SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird allows you to restore databases from previously
created backup copies.
To open the Restore Database Wizard select the Services | Restore Database menu
item.
Select the desired restoration type - Restore from full backup or from incremental
backup.
Note that at the moment restore from incremental backup is only available in InterBase
2007 and Firebird 2.1.
See also:
Backup Database
Specific DB Tools
Using templates

Availability:
Windows Lite No
9.2.2.1 Selecting destination database
On the first step you are to specify basic parameters for restoring the database.
Source file
Locate the backup file from which the restoration should be performed
Restore into
If you select to restore to a new database on the next step you will need to specify the
database and host connection parameters.
Select to restore into the existing database, or to create a new database. If you restore

into the existing database, then select it from the list of registered databases. You will
also need to proved authentication information: user name and password for
connecting to the database.
Execution mode
The group defines whether services or local utilities (FB) will be used to perform restore.
Restore mode
Select whether the database will be restored locally (available if the Execution mode is
set to local utilities) or to the server.
9.2.2.2 Restore from incremental backup
Note: this step only appears iw you selected Restore from incremental backup at the
first step of the wizard.
Restore to...

For restoring into Existing database please select the destination database from the
drop-down list. Otherwise you need to browse for a new database or type in its name
manually.
Restore source
In case of selecting specifying backup files manual you will need to browse for the
Level 0 backup (and for level N, if any, optionally).
Click the Next button to proceed to the Starting process/Viewing results step of the
wizard.
9.2.2.3 Restoring DB on a new host
Note: this step is skipped if you chose Database is located on a new host in the
beginning.
Set the connection properties in the corresponding boxes: protocol, host name, user

name, password and misc.
On the next step you will be asked to enter SSH settings. If you do not use tunneling
please proceed to the next step.
Use Secure Shell (SSH) tunneling

The use of this option allows you to connect to hosts over a Secure Shell Tunnel. The
traffic is encrypted to protect individual and corporate data. See SSH tunneling options
for details.

9.2.2.4 Setting restore options
This step allows you to set basic options for restoring the database.
Deactivate indices
If this option is checked, database indices are deactivated while restoring.
Don't recreate shadow files

If this option is checked, shadow files are not recreated while restoring.
Don't enforce validity conditions

If this option is checked, database validity conditions are not restored.
Commit after each table

If this option is checked, SQL Manager commits work after restoring each table.
Replace existing database

If this option is checked, the restored database replaces the existing one.
Use all space

Restores database with 100% fill ratio on every data page, instead of the default 80% fill
ratio.
Page size
Database page size in bytes.
wizard.

9.2.3 Database validation

The Database Validation Wizard allows you to validate the database for verifying the
integrity of data structures. To activate the wizard choose the menu item Services |
Database Validation.
You should validate a database:
· Whenever a database backup is unsuccessful.

· Whenever an applcation receives a "corrupt database" error.
· Periodically, to monitor for corrupt data structures or missallocated space.
· Any time you suspect data corruption.
Note: As a rule, database validation requires exqlusive access to the database.
See also:

Shutdown database
Specific DB Tools
Using templates
Availability:
Windows Lite No
9.2.3.1 Selecting database for validation
The Database Validation Wizard guides you through all the process.
On the first step you are to choose the database for validation. To do that, use the
apropriate drop-down list.
Optionally you can select to shutdown the target database before start and bring it online
after the process is finished.
Database
Select the database to validate.
Execution mode
Define the means of validation. It can be standard services or local utilities(only

available for Firebird).
Click Next to go to the Validation Options page.
9.2.3.2 Validation options
Step two: set the database validation options to retrieve and press the Finish button.
Return a list of limbo transactions

If this option is checked, the database is checked on transactions in limbo, i.e.
transactions, that can't be defined as executed or aborted.
Validate the database, but don't repair it

"Read Only" mode of validation. By default, validating a database updates it, if
necessary. Check this option to prevent updating.
Ignore Checksum
A checksum is a page-by-page analysis of data to verify its integrity. A bad checksum
means that a database page has been randomly overwritten (for example, due to a
system crash).
Kill all unavailable shadow files

If this option is checked, server drops the shadows which cannot be used.

Prepare a corrupt database for backup

Performs total cleaning of the corrupt database, preparing the database for backup.
Perform a database sweep

Removes all outdated records.
Validate the database structure

Repairs corrupt or misallocated structures.
Validate record fragments

Releases unassigned record fragments.
9.2.4 Database statistics

The Database Statistics Wizard allows you to retrieve the database statistics. To
activate the wizard choose the Services | Database Statistics menu item.
See also:

Specific DB Tools
Using templates
Availability:
Windows Lite No
9.2.4.1 Selecting database for statistics
The Database Statistics Wizard guides you through all the process. On the first step
you are to choose the database for retrieving statistics. To do that, use the apropriate
drop-down list.
Database
Select the database for displaying statistics.

9.2.4.2 Database statistics options
Step two: set the database statistics options to retrieve and press the Finish button.
Select to retrieve
· all the database statistics

· stop retrieving after header page statistics,
· log pages statistics,
· user indices statistics,
· data tables statistics or
· system tables and indices statistics
by selecting the one of the appropriate Options items.

9.2.5 Start/Stop database

The Start/Stop Database wizard allows you to shutdown (sometimes you may need to
switch to the one-user database connection mode) and to bring database online back
again. To call the wizard, choose the Services | Start/Stop Database menu item.
Operations
Select the desired activity - shutdown database or bring it online.
Execution mode
Define the means of validation. It can be standard services or local utilities(only
available for Firebird).
See also:
Specific DB Tools
Using templates

Availability:
Windows Lite No
9.2.5.1 Shutdown database options
The Shutdown Database window allows you to switch to the one-user database
connection mode.
Forced
In this mode all the transactions, still active by the stated time, are forcedly aborted and
all the users are forcedly disconnected.
Deny new transactions

In this mode all the transactions must be executed by the stated time. Starting of any
new transactions is blocked. If there are some transactions still active by the stated time,
database shutdown are not executed.
Deny new attachments

In this mode all the active user attachments must finish their work by the stated time. If
there are some attachments still active by the stated time, database shutdown are not
executed.
Wait(seconds)
Time to wait the shutdown to execute.

9.2.5.2 Bring database online
To bring database online back again select the Start database at the first step of the
Start/Stop Database wizard.

Availability:
Windows Lite No
9.2.6 Rebuild indices

Highly fragmented indices may considerably decrease query performance. Index
fragmentation is remedied by either reorganizing or by rebuilding an index.
SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird allows you to recompute or rebuild indices.
To run the wizard, select the Services | Rebuild Indices main menu item, or right-click
the database alias in the DB Explorer tree and select the corresponding item.
· Selecting database for indices management

· Selecting the action for indices
· Selecting indices
· Starting process/Viewing results

· Using templates
See also:
Specific DB Tools
9.2.6.1 Selecting database for indices management
Database
Use the drop-down list of all registered databases on the selected host to specify the
database to manage indexes in.
Optionally you may set that the database should be switched into a single-user mode
before indices management and select it to be brought back online on finishing the
operation with the help of appropriate options.
Execution mode
The group defines whether services or local utilities (FB) will be used to perform backup.

9.2.6.2 Selecting the action for indices
Options
Recompute indices
Recompute the selectivity of all indices.
Rebuild indices
Rebuild all the indices and reset the statistics for each. This usually will increase
performance significantly.
Optionally you may select to deactivate indices and activate them again.

9.2.6.3 Selecting indices
This step of the wizard allows you to select indeces for management.
To select an inex, you need to move it from the Available list to the Selected list. Use
the buttons or drag-and-drop operations to move the indices from one list
to another.

wizard.

9.3 Server Tools

SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird provides graphical interface for all operations
concerned with granting permissions, managing database users and roles. The following
specific server tools are available in SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird:
· User Manager
Provides adding, deleting users, and editing global user privileges.
· Role Manager
Allows you to define user properties and its members.
· Grant Manager
Granting privileges on the selected databases, tables and fields.
· Server Messages Editor

Allows you to view an edit system messages of InterBase/Firebird server.
· Table Altering Monitor

Allows you to view the number of changes in table and view metadata.
· Search in Metadata
Allows you to find the needed database metadata quickly.
· Event Monitor
Allows you to see the notifications made by event alerters.
· Database Monitor
Displays various statistics on database in general and database activities.
See also:
Specific DB Tools
9.3.1 Users
A database user is a security principal enabling object access permission control at the
finest level of granularity. A user represents a single server login within the scope of the
database in which the user is defined.
Create user
To create a new user:

· Select User in the New Object Dialog.
· Edit user definition within the User Manager.
Hint: To create new user you can also right-click the Users node of the explorer tree
and select the New User... item from the popup menu.
To create a new user with the same properties as one of the existing users has:


Edit user
To edit the existing user:
· Select the user for editing in the explorer tree (type the first letters of the user name
for quick search).
· Right-click and select the Edit User <User_Name> item from the popup menu or
simply double-click the user.
· Edit user definition and data on the appropriate tabs of the User Manager.
To change the name of the user:
· Select the user to rename in the explorer tree.

· Right-click and select the Rename User <User_Name> item from the popup menu.
· Edit user name in the dialog window.
Drop user
To drop a user:
· Select the user to drop in the explorer tree.

· Right-click and select the Drop User <User_Name> item from the popup menu.
9.3.1.1 User Manager
The User Manager allows you to define user properties and membership. It opens when
you create a new user or edit the existing one (see Create User and Edit User for
details).

· Editing user info
See also:
Grant Manager
Role Manager

Availability:
Windows Lite Yes
Object bar:
· Select a host and a user for editing within the current window.
General bar:
· Add new user
· Edit existing one
· Delete user
The next bar displays various actions according to the current page of User Editor.

9.3.1.1.2 Editing user info
The User Editor window allows you to edit user information. Use Add/Edit user item of
the General bar or simply double-click the user to edit.
You should specify password and personal info for existing users.
If you want to add current user to any of existing role please proceed to the Roles tab of
the User Editor.

9.3.2 Roles
All users interact with a IB/FB server within the context of a role. A user can belong to
multiple groups and have multiple roles, and the operations that are permitted by each
role determine the actions that a user can perform.
Create role
To create a new role:

· Select Role in the New Object Dialog.
· Edit role definition within the Role Manager.
Hint: To create new role you can also right-click the Roles node of the explorer tree
and select the New Role... item from the popup menu.
To create a new role with the same properties as one of the existing roles has:

Edit role
To edit the existing role:
· Select the role for editing in the explorer tree (type the first letters of the role name for
quick search).
· Right-click and select the Edit Role <Role_Name> item from the popup menu or
simply double-click the role.
· Edit role definition and data on the appropriate tabs of the Role Manager.
To change the name of the role:
· Select the role to rename in the explorer tree.

· Right-click and select the Rename Role <Role_Name> item from the popup menu.
· Edit role name in the dialog window.
Drop role
To drop a role:
· Select the role to drop in the explorer tree.

· Right-click and select the Drop Role <Role_Name> item from the popup menu.
9.3.2.1 Role Manager
The Role Editor allows you to define user properties and its members. It opens when
you create a new role or edit the existing one (see Create Role and Edit Role for details).


· Defining role members
See also:
User Manager
Grant Manager
Availability:
Windows Lite Yes
Object bar:
· Select a database and a role for editing within the current window.
General bar:
· Add new role
· Edit existing one
· Edite role members
· Delete role
The next bar displays various actions according to the current page of Role Editor.

9.3.2.1.2 Defining role members
On this page you can assign the necessary roles to the users. Select the user name in the
left part of the window (Available Users) and move it to the Selected Users list at the
right using buttons >, <, >>, <<, by double-clicking or dragging it. That will assign the
members of current role.
Note: To create, edit and delete users and roles you should have the rights of server
administrator.

9.3.3 Grant Manager

Grant Manager allows you to set the user access grants for certain database objects.
'Global' user privileges define the user access rights to all the database objects on the
server. Granting privileges on the selected database objects allows a user to perform the
defined operation over the selected objects.
To open Grant Manager, select the Tools | Grant Manager main menu item.
· Using Navigation bar and context menu

· Managing database-specific privileges
· Managing column permissions
Managing grants
To define grants on database objects:

· select the Tools | Grant Manager main menu item, or use the corresponding
toolbar button to open Grant Manager;
· select the object type using the drop-down list on the toolbar;
· select a User or Role from the Privileges for pane of the Navigation bar;
· edit user/role privileges using Grant Manager.
9.3.3.1 Using Navigation bar and context menu
The Navigation bar of Grant Manager allows you to:

· select the database for grants management;
· refresh the content of the window;
· grant all privileges on all objects
· revoke all privileges on all objects
· select an existing database user/role to grant privileges for;
· view the legend;
· restore the default size of the window.

The context menu is aimed at facilitating your work: you can perform a variety of
operations using context menu items.
The context menu of Grant Manager allows you to:

· grant a permission on a securable to the selected principal;
· grant a permission (with Grant Option) on a securable to the selected principal;
· revoke a previously granted or denied permission;
· grant all permissions on a securable to the selected principal;
· grant all permissions (with Grant Option) on a securable to the selected principal;
· revoke all previously granted or denied permissions on a securable;
· grant a permission on all objects to the selected principal;
· grant a permission (with Grant Option) on all objects to the selected principal;
· revoke a previously granted or denied permission on all objects;
· apply sorting of objects in grid (by type);
· apply sorting of objects in grid (by name).

See also:
Managing database-specific privileges
Managing column permissions
9.3.3.2 Managing database-specific privileges
This window allows you to define privileges on database objects and grant privileges to a
user or role.
To edit the privileges of a user/role on an object of a database, select the database using
the Database pane of the Navigation bar, then select a user or role from the Privileges
for list available within the Navigation bar. Then select the type of objects to be
displayed in the main working window using the combo-box at the top.
The Object Name column contains the list of the objects of the selected type; each
subsequent column corresponds to the permission which can be granted on the selected
object: Select, Insert, Update, Delete, Execute, References.
The list of the objects displayed can be configured in several ways: you can specify that
only granted objects are displayed in the grid, or define an object name to filter the
objects by that name.
Right-click a cell to grant a specific permission on a certain object. To grant a permission

on an object, you should find the object in the Object Name list and the column with
the corresponding permission. The context menu of a cell contains possible permissions
that can be granted:
· Grant
· Grant with Grant Option

· Revoke (removes a previously granted or denied permission)

· Grant All
· Grant All with Grant Option
· Revoke All
· Grant on All
· Grant on All with Grant Option
· Revoke on All
Check the Granted only option to display objects with at least one granted operation.
See also:
Using Navigation bar and context
menu
Managing column permissions

9.3.3.3 Managing column permissions
The Column permissions of user/role area displays the grid with table columns and
the privileges that can be granted to the selected user or role.
Use items of the context menu to grant/deny/revoke permissions on columns.
If permissions on a column have been defined (for a table or view), the corresponding
permission cell of the table/view contains a specific icon .
See also:
Using Navigation bar and context
menu
Managing database-specific privileges
9.3.4 Server Messages Editor

IB Messages Editor allows you to view an edit system messages of InterBase/Firebird
server. It may be useful for finding the exact message you need, editing standart server
message to you likings or simply translating it messages into your native language.
To open it you are to select Tools | IB Messages Editor item from the main menu.

· Open messages file

· Find text in the messges file loaded
· Perform export/import operations
The next bar displays various actions according to the current page of IB Messages
Editor.
9.3.4.2 Editing IB Messages
IB Messages Editor allows you to view an edit system messages of InterBase/Firebird

server. It may be useful for finding the exact message you need, editing standart server
message to you likings or simply translating it messages into your native language.

9.3.5 Table Altering Monitor

Table Altering Monitor allows you to view the number of changes in table and view
metadata. InterBase allows editing table or view metadata up to 255 times, after
reaching this limit backup and restoring the database is recommended.
To call this window select the Tools | Table Altering Monitor menu item.
See also:
Table Editor
View Editor
Server Tools
9.3.6 Search in Metadata

Search in Metadata dialog allows you to find the needed database metadata quickly.
To call this dialog select the Tools | Search in Metadata menu item.
Text to Find
Set the text to search for.
Database
Select the database to search in. Unavailable if Search in all active databases
checked.
Case Sensitive
Differentiates uppercase from lowercase when performing a search.
Whole words only

Searches for words only. (With this option off, the search string might be found within
longer words.)
Regular Expressions

Recognizes regular expressions in the search string.
When all the options are set, click OK. If the required text was found, the report window
Search in Metadata [text to find] appears. It contains the tree of current database
objects, where the given text is met. Select an object to view its DDL. The enclosed
object branches allow you to go to the needed fragment quickly.
After the search is complete you will see the result window. On the left the list of objects
is available; click any of them to view its definition which contains the text you looked
for.

See also:
Server Tools
9.3.7 Event Monitor

Event Monitor allows you to see the notifications made by event alerters. Event alerters
are messages passed from the database to an application; enables applications to recieve
asynchronous notification of database changes.
To call this window select the Tools | Event Monitor menu item.
For example: you need to get notification when some event takes place. You can use
inside the procedure or trigger body the instruction like POST_EVENT 'Null_field_met' in the
example below.
BEGIN
/* Statements... */
POST_EVENT 'Null_field_met';
/* Statements... */
END

When the statements are executed the notifications will appear in the Events Monitor
window..
You can set event alerter by selecting the Event options... item of the main menu.
See also:
Defining Events
Server Tools
9.3.8 Database Monitor

Database Monitor displays various statistics on database in general and database
activities.
To call the Database Monitor window please select the Tools | Event Monitor main
menu item.
The Navigation bar at the left allows you to:
· select a desired database at the Database bar;

· set monitoring options;
· pause/resume monitoring.
The information collected is split into sections and can be obtained at the corresponding
tabs.
See also:
Server Tools

9.3.9 Plugins options

On this tab the installed plugins are displayed. They are divided into the Common tools,
that are plugins, performed for working with the program as a whole, and Tools for
objects, performed for working with database objects. At the bottom of the window the
description of the selected plugin is displayed. To install a new plugin, click button Add
plugin and select a file, where the plugin is stored. Using button Remove plugin you
can uninstall the selected plugin. Using buttons at the right of the window you can also
create, rename, delete and change the order of subfolders in Plugins tree to access the
plugins easier.
Plugin Options Tab

On this tab the information about the selected plugin is displayed.
Plugin is a common tool

The selected plugin is performed for working with the program as a whole.
Plugin is built in object editor

The selected plugin is built-in to the database object editor (table, procedure, view, etc.).
Plugin has options dialog

The options of the selected plugin are available for editing when you will work with this
plugin.

Unload plugin after executing

The selected plugin will be automatically unloaded after executing.
At the right of the window the list of object editors is displayed, where those, available
for the selected plugin, are checked.
At the bottom of the window you can edit the menu item and define a hot key for faster
access to the plugin or to the plugin option window.
Place button on toolbar

This option places a button for activating plugin to the control panel.
See also:
Server Tools

Part
X
10 Personalization
SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird provides you with capabilities for flexible
personalization of the application.
Please see the chapters below to learn how to use personalization tools effectively.
· SQL Manager Options
· Localization
· Keyboard templates
· Object templates
See also:
Getting started
Database Explorer
Database management
Data management
Import/Export tools
Database tools
Server tools
External tools

10.1 SQL Manager Options

SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird provides full customization of the program
interface, windows behavior, various options of all tools and more. This chapter informs
you how to use these options.
The following list contains the three basic groups of options available in SQL Manager
Environment Options
General SQL Manager options: environment style, confirmations, window restrictions, DB
Explorer, SQL Editor, SQL Monitor, Visual Query Builder options, and more.
Editor Options
Customizing of all the SQL editing tools - SQL Editor, SQL Script, and more.
Visual Options
Customizing program interface - bars, trees, menus, etc.
Besides, the Options dialog allows you to export all program settings to a *.reg file for
future use, e.g. when you need to move the settings to another machine (see Save
Settings for details).
See also:
Localization
Keyboard Templates
Find Option dialog
10.1.1 Environment Options

Environment Options allow you to customize general options of the SQL Manager
application.
To open the Environment Options window, select the Options | Environment

Options... main menu item, or use the Environment Options button on the main
toolbar.
· Preferences
· Full mode activation
· Confirmations
· Windows
· Tools
· DB Explorer
· Object Editors
· SQL Editor
· SQL Monitor
· SQL Script

· Query Builder
· Visual Database Designer
· Print Metadata
· Data Export
· Database Monitor
· Dependencies
· Transactions
· Fonts
· Grid
Data Options
Print Data
Color & Formats
Advanced
Column Options
· Localization
· Find Option
See also:
Editor Options
Visual Options
Save Settings
10.1.1.1 Preferences
Show splash screen at startup

Displays the splash screen of SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird at the application
startup.
Restore desktop on connect

This option determines whether the previously opened windows and their positions
should be restored upon connection to the database.
Disable multiple instances

Checking this option prevents one from running multiple instances of SQL Manager 2008
for InterBase/Firebird.
Encrypted passwords
Encrypts passwords for connecting to databases in Windows registry.
Show desktop panel (for MDI Environment style only)

Displays Desktop Panel when no child windows are open.
Show Full Version features

This option is available in the Lite version of SQL Manager. When selected, a 30-day
period of fully-functional usage is activated.

See also:
Full mode activation
Confirmations
Windows
Tools
Fonts
Grid
Localization
Find Option
10.1.1.2 Full mode activation
Note that when using the FREE Lite version of SQL Manager 2008 for
InterBase/Firebird (which contains functional limitations) you can activate a 30-day
period of fully-functional usage. During this period you will get the splash screen
displaying the number of days left every time you start the application. After the period
expires, you will be able to continue using the Lite version.

To activate the 30-day Full version mode, please enable the Show Full Version
features option of the Preferences dialog.
See also:
Preferences
Confirmations
Windows
Tools
Fonts
Grid
Localization
Find Option
10.1.1.3 Confirmations
Confirm saving the object (or document) upon closing the editor
If this option is on, the program requires confirmation each time you want to save
changes in a database object or document.
Confirm dropping of object

If this option is checked, the program requires confirmation of dropping a database
object.
Confirm exit from SQL Manager

If this option is set, you are prompted for confirmation each time when you exit the
application.
Confirm deleting records

This option enables/disables a confirmation dialog for deleting records.
Confirm metadata changing (Changing Metadata Window)

This option enables/disables the Changing Metadata window.
Confirm addition into spell checking dictionary

Check this option if you wish to be prompted for adding a word to the dictionary which is
used for checking words spelling.
Confirm transformation of misprint into substitution

If this option is checked, you need to confirm replacing a misprinted word with a
corresponding substitution word.
Confirm transaction commit

If this option is checked, the program requires confirmation on attempt to commit a
transaction.
Confirm transaction rollback

If this option is checked, the program requires confirmation on attempt to rollback a

transaction.
Confirm transaction commit on closing data in object editors

If this option is checked, the program prompts to commit the transaction upon closing
the 'Data' tab in object editors.
Transaction confirmation in SQL Editor and Query Builder
Disable transaction confirmation on closing the editor

If this option is checked, no transaction confirmation will be required on closing SQL
Editor and Query Builder. Specify the default action (Commit or Rollback) and this
action will be performed automatically each time when you exit Query Builder or SQL
Editor.
See also:
Preferences
Windows

Tools
Fonts
Grid
Localization
Find Option
10.1.1.4 Windows
Environment style
This switch allows you to define the basic window environment - MDI (like Microsoft®
Office) or Floating windows (like Borland® Delphi IDE).
Windows restrictions
This option allows you to set the number of editors (Table Editor, SQL Editor, etc.) that
can be opened at the same time.
Zoom options
This group of options is only available if Environment Style is set to Floating windows
environment. It allows you to set maximization size for child windows:
Full screen
Restricted by Main Form
Restricted by Main Form and DB Explorer
Justified my Main Form and DB Explorer.
Bar style for child forms

Here you can define the location of action buttons: within the Navigation bar (on the
left) and/or on the Toolbar.
If necessary, you can also Enable floating toolbars for your application.

See also:
Preferences
Confirmations
Tools
Fonts
Grid
Localization
Find Option
10.1.1.5 Tools
Show only connected databases in drop-down menu

If this option is checked, only connected databases are displayed in drop-down menus of
such tools as Query Builder, SQL Script, etc.
Don't fill server lists in connection forms

If this option is checked, the server list will be filled up with the names of most recently
used servers that are stored locally in the Windows registry. Otherwise, SQL Manager will
scan the network to fill in the server lists in connection forms.
Allow using parameters in query text

This feature allows you to specify different values within a query in a popup dialog just
before the query execution. Use the colon (':') character before an identifier (e.g. :P1) to
specify a parameter within the query.
Asynchronous query execution

Check this option to allow executing queries in background mode (asynchronously).
Use transactions in Data tab of object editors, SQL Editor and Query Builder
If this option is enabled, a transaction is active until the 'Data' tab is closed or the
'Commit' button is pressed; all edited records are blocked until the transaction is
committed. If this option is disabled, the transaction starts and is immediately committed
(autocommit) on saving each record which is blocked only for a short period of time.
Use shared connection for each data view within a database

Uncheck this option to use separate connection for each data view within a database.
Note that this option is only available when the Use transactions in Data tab of object

editors, SQL Editor and Query Builder option is enabled.
Get info messages in Procedure Editor on execution of a procedure

This option enables/disables information messages returned upon procedure execution.
Try to open server cursor and get info messages in SQL Editor
This option determines whether the application should attempt to open server cursor,
and enables/disables information messages returned upon query execution in SQL Editor.
See also:
Preferences
Confirmations
Windows
Fonts
Grid
Localization
Find Option
10.1.1.5.1 DB Explorer
Show hosts in DB Explorer

Shows/hides database hosts in the DB Explorer tree.
Show table subobjects

Shows/hides table subobjects (fields, indexes, etc.) in the DB Explorer tree.
Sort by aliases
Use this option to apply sorting registered databases by their aliases in the DB Explorer
tree.
Rename objects by editing in place

Allows you to edit object names in DB Explorer by selecting any object and clicking its
alias one more time.
Refresh objects on showing in SQL Assistant

This option enables/disables refreshing objects each time they are displayed in SQL
Assistant.
Search on categories
This option determines the search scope when the Find Item feature is used: if this
option is selected, the search is performed within the currently selected category (node
in the tree) only.
Hide empty schemas

This option allows you to specify whether schemas containing no objects will be displayed
in the DB Explorer tree.

Recent objects count

Defines the number of objects displayed within the Recent tab of the DB Explorer.
Table details in SQL Assistant

These options switch the SQL Assistant mode for displaying table details (fields, Foreign
keys, checks, indexes, triggers, table info, definition or description).
Expand on connection
This group of options allows you to specify the node(s) indicating type(s) of objects that
will be expanded within DB Explorer upon successful connection to the database.
10.1.1.5.1.1 SQL Assistant
Tables' Details in SQL Assistant

Switches the SQL Assistant mode for displaying table fields, indices, foreign keys, table
status, definition or description. Also you can set the mode for displaying views, UDF's,
procedures, exceptions and generators.

10.1.1.5.2 Object Editors
All
Convert created objects' names to lower case

Enable this option if you need to convert the names of all newly created objects to the
lower case automatically.
Table Editor
Always open the Fields tab

If this option is checked, the Fields tab is activated by default on opening a table in
Table Editor.
Show Object Explorer

Enables/disables the Object Explorer panel within the Navigation bar of Table Editor.
Do not retrieve record count for a table

Check this option to disable retrieving record count for tables (with this feature enabled,
opening large tables may take much time).

Object list style
These options allow you to define the style of the combo-boxes used to select database
objects (e.g. Table or view in Trigger Editor). Objects can be represented as a tree, a list
sorted by namespace or a list sorted by name. Use the Ignore case option to
enable/disable case sensitive sorting.
10.1.1.5.2.1 Table Editor
Always open the Fields tab

Always opens the Fields tab default on activating the Table Editor.
Change tab by click Object Explorer

If checked, allows switching between Table Editor tabs by cliking on the corredsponding item in the
Object Explorer.

10.1.1.5.2.2 Procedure Editor
Recompile dependencies
Recompiles the definition of objects that refer to the current procedure.

10.1.1.5.3 SQL Editor
Show actual execution plan on query execution

If this option is checked, the query plan is displayed at the bottom of the SQL Editor
window.
Show result for each query

With this option checked, when you execute two or more queries (divided by "GO"), the
result of each query will be displayed. Otherwise, only the result of the last query will be
displayed.
Show results on Edit tab

If this option is checked, the Results tab is displayed as a separate tab.
Execute selected text separately

Check this option to allow execution of the selected statement separately.
Write only successfully executed queries to database SQL log file

If this option is checked, unsuccessful queries will not be saved to the SQL Editor log file
(see Setting log options in the Database Registration Info dialog).

Don't save queries automatically for the next session

If this option is checked, the SQL query text will not be saved. Otherwise, it will be saved
in Windows registry and will be therefore available in the next application sessions.
Always save changes in Favorite Queries before closing

This option enables/disables saving changes in SQL queries marked as Favorite
automatically upon closing the editor.
Refresh DB Explorer upon successful DDL statement execution

If this option is selected, the content of DB Explorer is refreshed each time a DDL
statement is executed successfully in SQL Editor.
10.1.1.5.4 SQL Monitor
SQL log
This group of options allows you to enable logging of all SQL Monitor events to a file.
Check the Log SQL Monitor events to file option, specify the path to the log file using
the button, and enter a name for the *.sql file. To clear the log file after it reaches
some definite size, check the Clear log file when it is greater than... option and set
the maximum file size (in Kilobytes).

Show time of operation

If this option is checked, the execution time of logged operations is added.
Always show on top

Displays the SQL Monitor window always on top.
10.1.1.5.5 SQL Script
Abort script on error

If this option is checked, script execution is aborted if an error occurs.
Rollback on abort
This option is only available if the Abort script on error option is checked. This option
evokes automatic rollback when script execution is aborted.
Enable parsing
With this option checked, SQL Script Editor parses the loaded script to enable fast
navigation in the Script Explorer tool.

Show message when done

Displays a message box on finishing script execution.
Show info messages

Select this option to enable information messages when working with scripts.
Don't clear error list on selected text execution

If this option is checked, the error list is not cleared upon execution of the selected
statement.
10.1.1.5.6 Query Builder
General options
Allow SELECT queries only

When this option is checked, the INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE statements are not
allowed in Query Builder.
Select condition row

Displays the selected condition in different rows on the Criteria and Grouping Criteria

tabs of Query Builder.
Drag field name

Displays the dragged field name in the Builder area.
Hide selection when inactive

Hides the selection when the Query Builder window is inactive.
Show field types

Displays the field type next to the field name in the Table box.
Union all by default

Check this option to use the UNION ALL expression in Query Builder by default.
The UNION keyword allows you to include the results of two SELECT statements in one
resulting table.
The ALL parameter incorporates all rows into the results, including duplicates. If not
specified, duplicate rows are removed.
Allow owner prefix for dbo objects

Adds the schema name to the table name in the 'Table' box caption (for [dbo] schema
objects)
Show actual execution plan on query execution

If this option is checked, the query plan is displayed within the corresponding tab of the
Query Builder window.

Visible tabs
These options specify which Query Builder tabs are available and which are not. Use the
check boxes to make the corresponding tabs visible/invisible.
Script format
These options specify case formatting of keywords and functions in query text within the
Edit tab: As is keeps the original case, Uppercase sets all the keywords/functions to the
upper case, Lowercase sets all the keywords/functions to the lower case, and First upper
sets the first letters of all keywords/functions to the upper case.
Additionally, you can set styles and color for all Query Builder objects by using Style
and Color Palette.
10.1.1.5.6.1 Style & Color Palette
Style
These options specify the way various Query Builder elements look: the Condition
button: Flat, 3DLook, Raised; object borders: Bump, Etched, Raised, Sunken. If
necessary, you can also specify flatness for objects and buttons using the corresponding

options.
XP tables style
This option determines the appearance of non-client areas of tables in Query Builder.
Show icons on tabs

With this option selected, you can see icons next to the tab names in Query Builder.
Color palette
These options define the colors of various Query Builder elements: active condition row,
condition text, condition item text, table client area, etc. Click an item to select a color
for the corresponding element using the Color dialog where you can specify the required
color from the palette.
10.1.1.5.7 Visual Database Designer
Model notation
When you work in Visual Database Designer, you can choose one of the following
modeling notations:
· Integration DEFinition for Information Modeling (IDEF1X);

· Information Engineering (IE).
The IDEF1X and IE notations use different symbols to represent relationships between
entities (and tables).
Draw PRIMARY KEY fields separately

Separates Primary key fields from other fields with a horizontal line.
Draw entities icons

Displays icons at the left of each entity header according to its type.
Draw attributes icons

Displays icons at the left of each attribute according to its type (Primary key, Foreign
key, ordinary field).
Draw only names of entities

Enables highlight for entity names only.
Draw FOREIGN KEY fields separately

Enables highlight for Foreign key fields.

Show grid
Displays dots in the diagram area to make the grid visible.
Snap to grid
Automatically aligns entities on the form with the nearest grid line. You cannot place an
entity in between grid lines.
Grid size
Sets grid spacing in pixels along the x- and y-axes. Specify a higher number to increase
grid spacing.
Entity header font

Select a font type and size to display entity headers.
Attributes font
Select a font type and size to display attributes.
Additionally, you can set color for all VDBD diagram objects using Color Palette.
10.1.1.5.7.1 Color Palette
These options define the colors of various Visual Database Designer elements: work area,
work area text, entity, entity caption text, attribute text, etc. Click an item to select a
color for the corresponding element using the Color dialog where you can specify the
required color from the palette.


10.1.1.5.8 Extract Database
10.1.1.5.9 Print Metadata
Default Paper Size
Define the default paper size for reports created with the Print Metadata tool used:
A4 (210 x 297 mm)
Letter (8 1/2 x 11 ")

10.1.1.5.10 Data Export
This page allows you to customize formats applied to exported data. Edit the format
masks to adjust the result format in the way you need, or click the Set defaults button
if you wish to apply default data formats.

Fore more details see the Adjusting Data Formats page.
10.1.1.5.11 Database Monitor
Current tab allows you to set the refresh interval for the Database Monitor tool.

10.1.1.6 Dependencies
Automatically expand dependencies

Expands/collapses tree nodes when opening the tab with object dependencies.
Don't show empty object categories in dependencies

Hides/shows empty object categories in dependencies.
Max number of history items in Dependency Tree

Sets the number of history items browsing with the help of Previous/Next object items in Dependency
Tree.

10.1.1.7 Transactions
Here you can set the isolation level for data and metadata.
Isolation level determines how a transaction interacts with other simultaneous
transactions accessing the same tables.
Snapshot
Provides a repeatable-read view of the database at the moment the transaction starts.
Changes made by other simultaneous transactions are not visible.
Snapshot table stability provides a repeatable read of the database by ensuring that
transactions cannot write to tables, though they may still be able to read from them.
Read commited
Enables a transaction to see the most recently committed changes made by other
simultaneous transactions. It can also update rows as long as no update conflict occurs.
Uncommitted changes made by other transactions remain invisible until committed.

10.1.1.8 Fonts
This section of the Environment Options dialog allows you to specify fonts used in the
application.
The box below displays the sample text with the selected font applied.

System font name

Defines the font used by SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird. Select the font name
from the drop-down list of available system fonts.
System font size

Defines the font size used by SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird. Type in or use
the drop-down list to select the required value.
See also:
Preferences
Confirmations
Windows
Tools
Grid
Localization

Find Option
10.1.1.9 Grid
General options
Striped Grids
Displays the odd grid rows in a different color defined by the Stripy option.
Show editor immediately

Allows editing the cell value right after the cell is clicked.
Always show editor

Set this option to make the cell editors always active.
Enable auto-search in grid

If this option is checked, the cursor is automatically forwarded to the closest match when
you start typing.
Row multi-selection
With this option set, multiple rows can be selected in grid.
Invert selection
Determines whether a single cell within the focused row or the entire row is highlighted
when focused.
Column auto-width
With this option set, column widths are changed in order to display all columns without
using the horizontal scroll bar. If the content a column is still too large to display without
a need to resize the grid, then the column values are truncated and the hidden
characters are replaced with an ellipsis at the end.
Cell auto-height
If the widths of the columns are insufficient to display the full content, then text clipping
occurs. Set this option to prevent this. If this option is set, the cell content is displayed in
multiple lines where necessary. You can set the number of lines to display using the Cell
max line count option.

Grid layout preference
Autofit column widths

Use this option to shrink the grid columns so that the longest visible column value fits.
Save and restore layout

Use this option to keep the original grid width. Check the Restore sorting option to
apply defaults to sorting (except for SQL sorting) as well.
Root level options
These options are applied to the main view of the grid. See Grid View for details.
Detail level options
These options are applied to the detail view of the grid. See Grid View for details.
Show "Group by" box

Displays the gray area above the column caption allowing to group data in the grid.
Show indicator

Displays the row indicator.
Show navigator
Activates/deactivates the data navigator. The navigator pane is available at the top
within the Data tab of a view.
Show "New item row"

Displays an empty row at the bottom of a view which is a convenient way for adding data
to the grid.
Hide tabs for single detail

This option is useful when only one view is present on the detail level. When checked,
the view tab is hidden.
See also:
Preferences
Confirmations
Windows
Tools
Fonts
Localization
Find Option
10.1.1.9.1 Data Options
Limit options in table and view editors
Define the number of records to be selected on opening the Data tab of Table Editor and
View Editor:
Select all records from a table
Select only ... records (you should set the number of records using the corresponding
spin editor)
Advanced
Use SQL sorting in data view

If the option is checked, the data will be sorted according to SQL sorting parameters.
Use SQL filter in data view

Check/uncheck this option to enable/disable SQL filter in data view of Table Editor and
View Editor.
With the Use SQL Sorting in data view option enabled a click on the column header for
sorting causes reloading all table data with the selected field in ORDER BY expression of
the SELECT statement. Otherwise the sorting is performed by means of the grid. If the

table contains a huge number of records and the Select only XXX records mode (see
the Limit options in table and view editors group) is used, this mode is more
preferable (e.g. all the records having values starting with "A" will be displayed, and not
those which were in originally opened XXX records).
All above-mentioned is related to the Use SQL filter in data view option. If the filter is
applied to a table containing a great number of records, it is strongly recommended to
enable this option - in this case the filter will be applied to all table/view records, not
only to those which are displayed at the present moment.
Load visible rows mode if records more than...

Set this option to switch to the Load visible rows mode when the number of records in
the dataset exceeds the specified value.
String fields width (chars)

Using this option you can limit string fields width that may improve performance on large
datasets.
Default grid mode
Load all rows

The grid loads all records from a dataset. This option increases the grid performance by

reloading only changed dataset records when updating. In this mode all features
(automatic sorting, filtering and summary calculations) are available.
Load visible rows

The grid loads only a fixed number of dataset records into memory. This option
minimizes dataset loading time. Automatic sorting, filtering, summary calculations are
not available in this mode.
The Default grid mode options allow you to define the grid mode which will be used by
default.
With the Load all rows option enabled, when loading data, all the records are loaded
into grid buffers. In this mode opening the tables with many records may take a
considerable amount of time. But in this case you can make use of some advantages: in
the filter drop-down list the column headers are displayed with the values for quick
filtering; it is possible to open several sub-levels at the same time when viewing data in
master-detail view, etc.
In case opening and other operations with an object consisting of many records takes
sufficient time, the Load visible rows mode should be used instead. It can be set
individually for each table and saved between sessions (can be set via the context menu
of the grid).

10.1.1.9.2 Print Data
Save/restore following print data properties
These options specify which Print Data properties will be saved between work sessions
(e.g. if you tick off the Page settings item, those settings will be saved and stored
between the sessions).
You can save/restore the following Print Data properties: Card view representation,
Detail view representation, Expanding, Formatting, Level options, "On every page"
options, Pagination, Preview options, Image options, Selection options, Report size
options, Showing grid elements, Page number format, Page settings, Report title.
10.1.1.9.3 Color & Formats
Display formats
Integer fields
Defines the format for displaying TINYINT, SMALLINT, INTEGER and BIGINT fields.
Float fields
Defines the format for displaying FLOAT, DOUBLE and DECIMAL fields.
Datetime fields

Defines the format for displaying DATETIME fields.
For more information refer to the Format specifiers page.
Colors
Options of this group allow you to set colors for basic grid elements. Use the ellipsis
button to open the Color dialog allowing you to select the required color from the
palette.
Grid
Defines the background color of the data grid.
Row
Defines the color of the selected row in the data grid.
Stripy
Defines the color of the odd rows (applied if the Stripy grids option is set).
NULL values
Text

Defines the text that stands for NULL values in grid.
Font color
Defines the font color for displaying NULL values in the grid. Use the ellipsis button to
open the Color dialog allowing you to select the required color from the palette.
10.1.1.9.4 Advanced
Advanced options
Cell hints for clipped text

Indicates whether a hint box is displayed when hovering over a cell containing clipped
text.
Focus cell on cycle

Determines whether the focus moves to the next row after it reaches the right-most cell
within the current row.
Focus first cell on new record

Determines whether the focus moves to the first cell of a newly created row.
Next cell on pressing Enter

Determines whether the current view columns can be navigated by using the Enter key.
Show navigator hints

Indicates whether a hint box is displayed when hovering over navigation buttons.
MRU list in column filter

Enables showing of Most Recently Used items when filtering columns
Expand buttons for empty details

Specifies whether to display expand buttons within master rows that do not have
associated details.
Card width
Defines the width of the card used in Card View mode.

Form view
Large memo editor

Sets the number of lines for text-typed fields when viewing data in Form view.
Word wrap in memo editor

Determines whether long strings are wrapped within the memo editor area.
Word wrap in string editor

Determines whether long strings are wrapped within the string editor area.
Grid lines
Determines whether to display vertical and horizontal lines between cells.
Detail tabs position

Specifies the position of the tabs in detail level views: top or left.
Card layout direction

Specifies the direction of cards in Card View mode: horizontal or vertical.
Show edit buttons

Indicates when the edit buttons are displayed: never, for focused record or always.
10.1.1.9.5 Column Options
Common options
Auto-select text
Determines whether all text within an editor is automatically selected when the editor
gets focus.
Hide selection on losing focus

Determines whether the visual indication of the selected text remains when the editor
loses focus.
Memo editor options
Inserting Return characters

Specifies whether a user can insert return characters into text.
Inserting Tab characters

Specifies whether a user can insert tab characters into text.
Word wrap in grid

Determines whether long strings are wrapped in grid.
Popup memo editors

Turns on popup memo editors for text BLOB type fields.

Spin editor options
Use Ctrl+Up instead of Up to increase value

Allows you to use Ctrl+Up and Ctrl+Down key combinations for editing spin values (for
INTEGER field values).
Show large increment buttons

Determines whether fast buttons (for large increment) are visible within the editor.
Increment
Specifies the increment value for the spin editor.
Large increment
Specifies the fast increment value for the spin editor.
Spin editor buttons' position

Specifies the position of spin editor buttons: vertical, horizontal / left and right or
horizontal / right.

10.1.1.10 Localization
The Localization section of the Environment Options dialog is provided for managing
the localization files of SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird.
You can create your own *.lng files similar to those available in the
%program_directory%\Languages folder, add them to the list of available languages and
set the new language as the program interface language.
Default Directory
Use the Explorer button to specify the directory where the *.lng files are to be stored
by default.
Choose program language

Use the drop-down list of available languages to select the interface language to be
applied to the application.
Auto scan languages on startup

When checked, the directory with localization files will be scanned automatically at the
application startup; all the languages found will be added to the list of available
languages.
Available Languages
Lists all the languages available for localization and the corresponding *.lng files.
Double-click a language in the list to edit its name or the *.lng file.
Add Defaults
This button is used to search for *.lng files in the Default directory and add all of them
to the Available Languages list.
Add
Opens the Add language dialog where you can specify your own localization file and set
the language name.
Edit
Opens the Edit language dialog where you can change the language name or select
another localization file for the specified language.
Delete
Removes the selected language from the Available languages list (without
confirmation).

See also:
Preferences
Confirmations
Windows
Tools
Fonts
Grid
Find Option
10.1.1.11 Find Option
The Find Option section allows you to search for options available within the
Environment Options dialog easily and quickly.
Option
In this field you can enter the name of the option to search for within SQL Manager

Environment Options.
The Available options area lists all options of the Environment Options category
according to the specified name. Select the required option in the list and click Show
Option to open the corresponding dialog where you can view/edit the value of this
option.
See also:
Preferences
Confirmations
Windows
Tools
Fonts
Grid
Localization

10.1.2 Editor Options

Editor Options allow you to set the parameters of viewing and editing SQL statements
within the SQL Editor tool of the SQL Manager application.
To open the Editor Options window, select the Options | Editor Options... main menu
item, or use the Editor Options button on the main toolbar.
· General
· Display
· Color
· Quick Code
· SQL Formatter
· Key Mapping
· Spell Checking
· Find Option
See also:
Environment Options
Visual Options
Save Settings
10.1.2.1 General
Auto indent
If this option is checked, each new indention is the same as the previous one when
editing SQL text.
Indents and outdents are used in the process of text editing to make the source code
easier to read.
Insert mode
If this option is checked, the insert symbols mode is on by default.
Find text at cursor

If this option is checked, the Text to find field in the Find Text dialog is automatically
filled with the text on which the cursor is set.
Always show hyperlinks

If this option is checked, hyperlinks are displayed in the editor window. To open a link,
click it with the Ctrl key pressed.
Double click line

If this option is checked, double-clicking the line on which the cursor is set selects the
whole line.
Trim trailing spaces

If this option is checked, all spaces after the last symbol in line will be trimmed.
Fixed line height

Prevents line height calculation. If this option is checked, the default line height is taken.
Persistent blocks
Keeps marked blocks selected even when the cursor is moved with the arrow keys used,
unless a new block is selected.
Fixed column move

If this option is checked, the caret keeps its horizontal position when moved between
lines.
Optimal fill
Check this option to enable optimal algorithm of filling text content in the working area
of the editor.
Unindent keep align

Keeps align for the lines that are not indented.
Smart caret
This option determines the caret movement (up, down, line start, line end). The caret is
moved to the nearest position on the screen.
Resolve aliases
Disables highlighting and code completion feature for aliases.

Overwrite blocks
Replaces a marked block of text with whatever is typed next. If Persistent Blocks is
also selected, the text you enter is appended to the currently selected block.
Show caret in read only mode

Displays/hides the caret in read-only mode.
Copy to clipboard as RTF

If this option is checked, the selected text is copied in RTF format.
Drag and drop text

This option allows to drag and drop selected text.
Group undo
This option allows you to undo multiple actions of the same kind.
Group redo
This option allows you to redo multiple actions of the same kind.
Keep caret horizontal position

If this option is checked, the horizontal position of a cursor is kept. If you move the
cursor (using the Up and Down arrow keys) onto a line having length less than the
current cursor horizontal position, it will be positioned after the last symbol of the line.
Enable column selection

Enables/disables column selection mode.
Hide cursor on type

Hides/displays mouse cursor within the working area while a user is typing some text.
Hide dynamic (no focus)

Hides dynamic highlights when an editor is not focused.
Collapse empty lines

Collapses empty lines after a text range when this range has been collapsed.
Scroll to past line

When the option is enabled, you can scroll to the last line of the text, otherwise you can
scroll to last page.
Seek variables
Disables code completion feature for variables.
Word wrap
When on, text is wrapped at the right margin of the editor area to fit in the visible area.
Variable horizontal scrollbar

If this option is checked, the horizontal scrollbar varies according to the current content
of the editor.
Float markers
When enabled, markers are linked to the text, and they will move with the text while the
text is being edited; otherwise the markers are linked to the caret position, and stay

unchanged while the text is being edited.
Undo after save

Keeps undo buffer unchanged after saving.
Disable selection
Disables any selection when editing.
Draw current line focus

Draws the focus rectangle around the current line when the editor has focus.
Hide selection (no focus)

Hides the selection when the editor loses focus.
Greedy selection
Selects an extra column/line in column/line selection modes.
Keep selection mode

Enables selection for caret movement commands (like in BRIEF).
Select search result

Determines whether the search result should be selected.
Smart paste
When this option is enabled, the editor gets both Unicode and ANSI content from the
clipboard, converts them using the selected character set and selects the best text to be
pasted. This allows getting correct text copied from both ANSI and Unicode applications
disregarding the currently selected keyboard language.
Disable all code features

This option disables code completion, code folding, highlight and all options that are set
on the Quick Code page. For options that are set on the Color page, the defaults will be
applied.
Collapse level
Specifies the level of text ranges that will be affected by the "Collapse all" command.
Undo limit
Defines the maximum number of changes possible to be undone.
Tab mode
Specifies the way the TAB key is processed. Possible values are: Use tab character
(inserts a tab character); Insert spaces (inserts space characters); Dialog behaviour
(when the edit control is in a dialog, the focus is switched to the next control); Smart tab
(tabs to the first non-white space character in the preceding line).
Tab stops
Defines the tab length used when editing a text.
Comment symbols
Defines the symbols which will be used to comment code fragments.
Block indent

Specify the number of spaces to indent a marked block.
See also:
Display
Color
Quick Code
SQL Formatter
Key Mapping
Spell Checking
Find Option
10.1.2.2 Display
Gutter
Show line numbers

If this option is checked, line numbers are displayed in the SQL text editor window.
Gutter auto width

Enable this option to specify that the gutter width will be adjusted automatically.
Display line state

If this option is checked, a colored line indicating the state of all altered lines in the text
is displayed at the gutter of the editor window.
Use code folding

Check this option to enable to code folding feature of SQL Editor.
Width
Defines the gutter width in the editor window.
Color
Defines the gutter color in the editor window. Select an item from the drop-down list or
click the ellipsis button to select a color using the Color dialog where you can specify
the required color from the palette.
Right margin
Visible
Makes the right text margin visible.
Word break
Allows breaking the words at the right margin.
Position
Defines the position of the right text margin in the editor window.

Color
Defines the color of the right margin in the editor window. Select an item from the
drop-down list or click the ellipsis button to select a color using the Color dialog
where you can specify the required color from the palette.
Code staples
Visible
Makes the code staples visible in the editor window.
Single color
Check the option to apply a single color for code staples.
Offset
Specify the offset value for code staples.
Color
Defines the code staples color in the editor window (if the Single color option is
deselected). Select an item from the drop-down list or click the ellipsis button to
select a color using the Color dialog where you can specify the required color from the
palette.
Fonts
Use these options to set the fonts, style, size and color used in the editor. If the Show
only fixed-width fonts option is checked, only fonts with fixed width are displayed in
the Font dialog.

See also:
General
Color
Quick Code
SQL Formatter
Key Mapping
Spell Checking
Find Option
10.1.2.3 Color
The Color section of the Editor Options dialog allows you to specify the fonts, styles,
foreground and background colors, borders and other attributes of the text used by
the editor to mark out various text fragments: strings, numbers, SQL keywords, symbols,
comments, identifier links, highlighted links, table aliases, SQL datatypes, SQL variables,
SQL functions, wrong symbols, exceptions, parenthesis match, current lines, selected
text, search marks.
When setting colors, select an item from the drop-down list or click the ellipsis button
to select a color using the Color dialog where you can specify the required color from the

palette.
See also:
General
Display
Quick Code
SQL Formatter
Key Mapping
Spell Checking
Find Option
10.1.2.4 Quick Code
Select an object in the Completion list of objects and set quick code parameters for
the selected object. For your convenience the preview area (to the right of the
Completion list) illustrates the changes being made to each of the objects.
Repeat this procedure for each of the objects.
Code completion
If this option is checked, then on typing the first word characters in the SQL text editor
you will be offered some variants for the word completion in a popup list (an analogue of
the Code Insight feature in Delphi IDE). The popup list will appear after a period of
time defined by the Delay option.
Sensitivity
This option allows you to set the number of characters to be typed before code
completion is activated.
Specify whether items of the code completion list should be sorted by type or by
name, and check the Sort field names option to apply sorting for field names as well.
Code parameters
If this option is checked, the Delphi-like hint for functions is enabled.
Delay
Using this option you can change the time after which completion variants popup.
Auto launch keyboard templates

Allows you to use keyboard templates for faster typing frequently used expressions (see
Keyboard Templates).

Select the style to be applied to the words inserted automatically (Custom font, Font
style and colors, Back and foreground or Background only). Then, depending on the style
selection, set custom font, Font style, Foreground color, Background color,
Borders.
Vertical alignment
Allows you to set the vertical alignment of the words inserted automatically. Possible
values are: Top, Center, Bottom.
Capitalization
Allows you to change the case of the words inserted automatically. Possible values are:
Unchanged, Upper case, Lower case, Toggle case, Initial caps.
See also:
General
Display
Color
SQL Formatter
Key Mapping
Spell Checking
Find Option

10.1.2.5 SQL Formatter
SQL Formatter is a feature implemented in SQL Editor and is a useful tool for
formatting SQL queries, making SQL statements easy to read.
The Settings tab of the SQL Formatter section allows you to enable this feature and
apply SQL formatting to subqueries, if necessary.
Format SQL query

Check this option to enable SQL formatting.
Format subquery
Allows to format subqueries
The SQL words tab of the SQL Formatter section allows you to select the key words for
each action of SQL formatter and to set formatting parameters.
Wrap first element

Wraps the selected text at a specific column. Select the SQL key words after which
formatting should be applied.
Params in line/list
Allows you to display the parameters followed by the defined key words in list or in line.

OR - AND
Set the placement of the AND an OR operators according to the operands followed by
them. See the example below.
Left
WHERE
AND ...
AND ...
AND ...
Separate
WHERE
...
AND
...
AND
Right
WHERE
... AND
... AND
... AND
The Keywords case / Identifiers case options allow you to define the case of the
corresponding items.

You can choose UPPER, lower, Capitalize.

Default case means that the name of the identifier/keyword remains "AS IS".
Space before bracket

Adds a "space" character before the opening bracket and after the closing one.
Space into brackets

Adds a "space" character after the opening bracket and before the closing one.
Indent in list
Sets the size of indent relatively to the previous string.
See also:
General
Display
Color
Quick Code
Key Mapping
Spell Checking
Find Option
10.1.2.6 Key Mapping
For your convenience key mapping is provided in SQL Manager 2008 for
InterBase/Firebird. On this page you can set the shortcuts for various
commands/operations according to your needs.
Use the Commands list on the right to select the command for which you need to make
a shortcut, then place cursor into the Key editor and press the key combination you find
useful (use Ctrl Alt Shift buttons). After setting the shortcut, press the New button to
add it to the list of existing Key combinations.

Note: it is possible to set more that one key combination for the same
command/operation (e.g. Ctrl-K, Ctrl-H) using the Add button.
If necessary, you can export the current Key mapping list to an external file by pressing
the Export button.
Manage the shortcuts within the Key combinations list using the Delete (to remove the
selected item) and the Clear (to remove all shortcuts for this command/operation)
buttons.
It is also possible to save a custom Key mapping scheme, if necessary:

· set the shortcuts for the appropriate commands/operations;
· click the Save As... button;
· input the new scheme name in the corresponding dialog.
To delete a scheme, select it in the Scheme name drop-down list and press the Delete
button.
See also:
General
Display
Color
Quick Code
SQL Formatter

Spell Checking
Find Option
10.1.2.7 Spell Checking
Spell checking is a new feature implemented in SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/
Firebird for your convenience.
Set the necessary Spell checker mode:
Highlighting
In this mode incorrectly spelled and misprinted words are highlighted in the editor.
Autocorrection
In this mode incorrectly spelled and misprinted words are replaced with the
corresponding words from the Substitutions list automatically.
None
In this mode the spelling checker is disabled.
Use the Add... button to add a new item to the Substitutions list, the Edit... button to
alter the selected substitution, and the Delete button to remove the selected
substitution from the spelling checker vocabulary.

Case sensitivity
Support case consistency with substitution

If this option is selected, the spelling checker uses the case of words-substitutions when
performing a replacement.
Ignore case while spell checking

Check this option to disable case checking.
Keep the misprint case when replacing

Check this option if you do not wish to change the case of the replaced word.
Misprints
Controls of this group allow you to manage the spelling checker vocabulary: use the
Add... button to add a new misprint to the vocabulary, the Auto button to use the
default list of misprints, the Edit... button to change the selected misprint, the Delete
button to remove the selected misprint from the vocabulary, and the Clear button to
empty the list of misprints for the currently selected substitution.
It is also possible to exclude a misprint from spell checking without deleting the misprint.
This misprint will therefore remain in the vocabulary, but it will be ignored by the spelling
checker.
To mark a misprint as excluded, you need to move it from the Check list to the Ignore
list. Use the buttons or drag-and-drop operations to move the misprints
See also:
General
Display
Color
Quick Code
SQL Formatter
Key Mapping
Find Option
The Find Option section allows you to search for options available within the Editor
Options dialog easily and quickly.
Option
In this field you can enter the name of the option to search for within SQL Manager Editor
Options.

The Available options area lists all options of the Editor Options category according to
the specified name. Select the required option in the list and click Show Option to open
the corresponding dialog where you can view/edit the value of this option.
See also:
General
Display
Color
Quick Code
SQL Formatter
Key Mapping
Spell Checking
10.1.3 Visual Options

Visual Options allow you to customize the application interface style to your liking.
To open the Visual Options window, select the Options | Visual Options... main menu
item, or use the Visual Options button on the main toolbar.
Use the Scheme name box to select the interface scheme you would like to be applied:

MS Office 11 style, MS Office XP style, MS Office 2000 style, Windows XP native style or
Classic style.
· Bars and menus

· Trees and lists
· Edit controls
· Check boxes
· Buttons
· Page controls
· Group boxes
· Splitters
· Navigation bar
· Find Option
Group area at the bottom of each section within the Visual options dialog.
It is also possible to create one's own interface scheme, if necessary:

· set your preferences within the available sections of the Visual Options dialog (Bars
and menus, Trees and lists, Edit Controls, Check boxes, Buttons, etc.);
· click the Save As... button;
· specify the new scheme name in the Save Visual Scheme dialog.
See also:
Environment Options
Editor Options
Save Settings
10.1.3.1 Bars and menus
Use the Bars and menus section of the Visual options dialog to customize SQL
Manager bars style, menus animation and a number of general options concerning
toolbars and menus usage.

See also:
Trees and lists
Edit controls
Check boxes
Buttons
Page controls
Group boxes
Splitters
Navigation bar
Find Option
10.1.3.2 Trees and lists
Use the Trees and lists section of the Visual options dialog to view and edit the
corresponding options.

See also:
Bars and menus
Edit controls
Check boxes
Buttons
Page controls
Group boxes
Splitters
Navigation bar
Find Option
10.1.3.3 Edit controls
Use the Edit controls section of the Visual options dialog to customize the appearance
of various SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird edit controls: Border style, Button
style, Button transparency, etc.

See also:
Bars and menus
Trees and lists
Check boxes
Buttons
Page controls
Group boxes
Splitters
Navigation bar
Find Option
10.1.3.4 Check boxes
Use the Check boxes section of the Visual options dialog to customize the border style
and the appearance of check boxes and radio buttons.

See also:
Bars and menus
Trees and lists
Edit controls
Buttons
Page controls
Group boxes
Splitters
Navigation bar
Find Option
10.1.3.5 Buttons
Use the Buttons section of the Visual options dialog to customize SQL Manager buttons
.

See also:
Bars and menus
Trees and lists
Edit controls
Check boxes
Page controls
Group boxes
Splitters
Navigation bar
Find Option
10.1.3.6 Page controls
Use the Page controls section of the Visual options dialog to customize the style of all
SQL Manager page controls.

See also:
Bars and menus
Trees and lists
Edit controls
Check boxes
Buttons
Group boxes
Splitters
Navigation bar
Find Option
10.1.3.7 Group boxes
Use the Group boxes section of the Visual options dialog to customize all SQL Manager
group boxes to your liking.

See also:
Bars and menus
Trees and lists
Edit controls
Check boxes
Buttons
Page controls
Splitters
Navigation bar
Find Option
10.1.3.8 Splitters
Use the Splitters section of the Visual options dialog to customize all SQL Manager
splitters to your liking.

See also:
Bars and menus
Trees and lists
Edit controls
Check boxes
Buttons
Page controls
Group boxes
Navigation bar
Find Option
10.1.3.9 Navigation bar
Use the Navigation bar section of the Visual options dialog to customize the
Navigation bars of all SQL Manager tools according to your preferences.

See also:
Bars and menus
Trees and lists
Edit controls
Check boxes
Buttons
Page controls
Group boxes
Splitters
Find Option
The Find Option section allows you to search for options available within the Visual
Options dialog easily and quickly.
Option
In this field you can enter the name of the option to search for within SQL Manager
Visual Options.

The Available options area lists all options of the Visual Options category according to
the specified name. Select the required option in the list and click Show Option to open
the corresponding dialog where you can view/edit the value of this option.
See also:
Bars and menus
Trees and lists
Edit controls
Check boxes
Buttons
Page controls
Group boxes
Splitters
Navigation bar

10.1.4 Save Settings

Save Settings Wizard allows you to export the settings of SQL Manager 2008 for
InterBase/Firebird - wholly or partially - to a single *.reg file which can be applied
afterwards to SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird installed on another machine, or
it can be used to backup previous settings.
To start the wizard, select the Options | Save Settings main menu item.
· Specifying destination file

· Selecting settings
· Selecting databases
· Saving settings
See also:
Environment Options
Editor Options
Visual Options
10.1.4.1 Specifying destination file
This step of the wizard allows you to specify the location of the destination file.
Filename
Use the button to set the path to the *.reg file where the application settings are to
be saved.

Press the Next button to proceed to the next step of the wizard.
10.1.4.2 Selecting settings
This step of the wizard allows you to specify the information you need to be saved to the
result file: Nodes registration info, Database registration info, Database projects, Tabs,
Environment options, Editor options, Visual options, Keyboard templates, External tools
list, Form placements, MRU lists.

Press the Next button to proceed to the next step of the wizard.
10.1.4.3 Selecting databases
This step of the wizard allows you to select the database(s) to save the registration
settings.
To select a database, you need to move its alias from the Available Databases list to
the Selected Databases list. Use the buttons or drag-and-drop operations
to move the databases from one list to another.

Click the Finish button to start the saving settings process.
10.1.4.4 Saving settings
After the saving settings operation has been configured, you can immediately start the
process.
When all the settings are saved correctly, you will get the following message:
If necessary, you can click Details to display/hide extended information about the
operation.

10.2 Localization
When using SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird, your are provided with
multi-language interface support. You can change the program language, specify the
directories for your localization files easily, edit existing localizations and create your own
localization files.
Changing program language
In order to select the program interface language:

· select the Options | Select Program Language... main menu item;
· select the interface language in the Select Language dialog;
· click OK to apply the language and close the dialog.
Editing program localization
In order to edit the interface localization:

· open one of the program windows (e.g. Table Editor, SQL Editor) where you wish to
edit the localization of captions and hints;
· use the Shift+Ctrl+L keyboard shortcut to open the Localization Editor window;
· edit window captions and hints as necessary;
· click the Save button on the toolbar.
Note that the Localization Editor window is only available if the currently selected
language is different from the default.
Creating new localization files
In order to create a new localization file:

· create a new localization file similar to those located in the
%program_directory%\Languages folder;
· select the Options | Environment Options main menu item;
· proceed to the Localization section of the Environment Options dialog;
· click the Add button;
· set the language name and the path to the new *.lng file within the Language Info
Editor dialog.
The new language is added to the list of available languages. Now you can set it as the
interface language using the Select Program Language dialog or the Localization section
of the Environment Options dialog.
See also:
SQL Manager Options
Keyboard Templates
Find Option dialog
10.2.1 Localization Editor

The Localization Editor window allows you to edit the captions and hints of any SQL
Manager window, if the selected program language is different from the default one.

To call this window, use the Shift+Ctrl+L shortcut in any child window of SQL Manager
The working area of the window contains the element names and the corresponding
strings divided by the "=" character. These strings are what you see in the program as
menu items, window captions, button hints, etc. Edit them to change the program
appearance. Be careful and do not edit the identifiers that stand before the "=" character
- this will not produce any effect.
For your convenience the Find and Replace features are provided - the corresponding
toolbar buttons are used to call the Find Text dialog or the Replace Text dialog
respectively. The Search Again button enables the repeated search for the text that
was last searched.
When you are done with editing, click the Save button on the toolbar to apply the
changes you have made.
See also:
Select Program Language
Localization
10.2.2 Select Program Language

The Select Language dialog allows you to select a language for SQL Manager 2008 for
InterBase/Firebird localization.
To open this dialog, select the Options | Select Program Language... main menu
item.
The dialog displays the list of available languages configured on the Environment Options
| Localization page. Select a language from the list and click OK to confirm your choice
and close the dialog.
See also:

Localization Editor
Localization

10.3 Keyboard Templates

The Keyboard Templates window allows you to create new keyboard templates for
quicker typing regularly used expressions and to edit the existing ones.
To open this window, select the Options | Keyboard Templates... main menu item.
To add a new keyboard template, click the Add Template... button, set the template
name and define the template expression. In the upper right area of the window you can
change the case of the template expression.
You can deactivate an existing template by selecting it from the list on the left and
removing the Active flag of the template.
If necessary, you can also edit the template name using the Edit Template... button,
delete the template using the Delete Template button or edit the template expression
within the Expansion area of the window. For faster editing you can use the Cursor,
Author, Time, Date, Clipboard, Marker buttons.
Once you have defined the templates, you can use them in SQL Editor. First of all, make
sure that the Auto launch keyboard templates option is selected on the Quick Code
page of the Editor Options dialog. When editing SQL text in SQL Editor, type a template
name and use the Ctrl+J shortcut: the text associated with the template (Expansion)
will be inserted automatically.

See also:
SQL Manager Options
Localization
Find Option dialog

10.4 Find Option dialog

The Find Option dialog allows you to search for SQL Manager options easily.
To open this dialog, select the Options | Find Option main menu item.
Option
In this field you can enter the name of the option to search for within the specified
category.
The Available options area lists all options of the specified category according to the
specified name. Select the required option in the list and click Show option to open the
corresponding dialog where you can view/edit the value of this option.
See also:
SQL Manager Options
Localization
Keyboard Templates

Part
XI
11 External tools
When using SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird, you can add external Windows
applications to make your work more efficient.
Adding External Tools
In order to add an external program:

· select the Options | External Tools... main menu item;
· click the Add... button in the External Tools dialog;
· specify parameters of the new external tool within the External Tool Info editor;
· confirm adding the new external tool by clicking OK in the External Tool Info editor
and the External Tools dialog.
This adds the icon and the title of the application you have selected to the Tools |
External Tools submenu. Now you can run this tool quickly without closing SQL
Manager.
Removing External Tools
In order to remove an external program:

· select the Options | External Tools main menu item;
· select the tool to be removed in the Tools list of the External Tools dialog;
· press the Del key or click the Delete button within the dialog;
· click OK to confirm removing the tool and closing the dialog.
The selected tool has been removed and is no longer accessible from the Tools |
External Tools submenu.
See also:
Getting started
Database Explorer
Database management
Data management
Import/Export tools
Database tools
Server tools
Personalization

11.1 External Tools dialog

The External Tools dialog allows you to manage the list of external applications which
can be easily run from SQL Manager environment.
To open this dialog, select the Options | External Tools... main menu item.
Tools
Lists all added external applications.
Add...
Opens the External Tool Info editor for adding a new tool to the Tools | External Tools
submenu.
Edit...
Opens the External Tool Info editor for editing the title, the hot key, the path to the
executable file, the working directory and execution parameters of the tool currently
selected in the Tools list.
Delete
Removes the selected tool from the list of SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird
external tools.
To change the order of tools in the list, use the arrow buttons at the bottom
area of the dialog, or use the Ctrl+Shift+Up / Ctrl+Shift+Down shortcuts. You can also
drag-and-drop items within the list box to change their positions.

See also:
External Tool Info editor

11.2 External Tool Info editor

The External Tool Info editor allows you to set common parameters of running added
external programs from SQL Manager environment. This dialog is used both when adding
external tools and editing their parameters (see Add External Tool and External Tools).
Title
Enter the title to be displayed in the Tools | External Tools submenu of SQL Manager.
Hot Key
Press a key or a key combination to set it as a hot key for running the tool.
Program
Use the Explorer button to specify the path to the *.exe file of the external program.
Working Dir
Set the default working directory of the program.
Parameters
This box stores parameters for the program execution (if required).
See also:
External Tools dialog

Part
XII
12 Appendix
12.1 Viewing object DDL structure
The DDL (Data Definition Language) tab displays the SQL statement for creating the
object with all its subobjects, if any. This text is read-only. If you want to change the
object definition, use the appropriate editor tabs instead, or copy the text to the Windows
Clipboard to paste it in the SQL Editor or SQL Script Editor.
Hint: If more convenient, you can use the Save DDL to file and Open DDL in SQL
Editor items available on the DDL pane within the Navigation bar of object editors.

12.2 Editing object description

The Description tab allows you to view and edit the comment for the object (optional).
Note: Changing object description is performed by means of sp_updateextendedproperty

'MS_Description'.

12.3 Browsing object dependencies

The Dependencies tab allows you to view objects that depend on the object being
edited, and the objects that the edited object depends on.
Hint: To open a dependent object or a depending object in its editor, you can simply
double-click the object alias in the Objects that <object_name> depends on and
Objects that depend on <object_name> lists.

12.4 Setting object permissions

The Permissions tab allows you to view the permissions currently allocated for this
object, and to grant permissions on the object to any of the existing principals.
For details see Grant Manager.

12.5 Viewing object operations

The Viewing object operations tab displays operations (DML only) to be done for
current procedure/trigger. On clicking an operation you get its definition displayed at the
lower part of the window.

12.6 Changing Metadata window

The Changing Metadata window is used to trace the errors and edit SQL statements
during their compilation. The compilation window appears each time metadata is
changed, both when the compilation is successful and when there are compilation errors.
To hide this window for successful metadata changes, select the Don't show this
window on success option.
Compile SQL
This area displays the SQL statement pending to be executed to perform metadata
changing. In this area you can view and edit the SQL statement.
In case of a compilation error the Error tab also becomes visible - here you can view the
error description returned by the server.
Commit
This button starts execution of the statement(s). Click it to commit the current
transaction. This button is available only if there were no errors in compilation.
Rollback
This button cancels the script execution and allows you to return to the previous stage
(editor window or DB Explorer).
Rollback and Recompile

This button calls for recompilation with the changes you made in the Compile SQL area.
Use this button after correcting the SQL statement.

If necessary, you can copy information to clipboard and save it in a text editor
afterwards (the button is only enabled when a compilation error occurs).
If you want this window to appear only in case of an error, uncheck the Confirm
metadata changing (Changing Metadata Window) option (checked by default)
available within the Confirmations section of the Environment Options dialog.

12.7 Tip of the Day

This window allows you to see short messages notifying you about interesting
particularities and useful features of SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird.
To open this window, select the Help | Tip of the Day main menu item.
If you check the Show tips at startup option, this window will popup each time you
start SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird.

12.8 Find Text dialog

The Find Text dialog is provided for quick and flexible searching for specified text within
the working area of SQL Manager editors.
Text to find
Enter a search string in this box. The Arrow-Down button which can be found next to the
input box allows you to select any of the previously entered search strings.
Options
Case Sensitive
This option can be used to differentiate uppercase characters from lowercase ones during
the search process.
Whole words only

Use this option to search for words only (with this option off, the search string might be
found within longer words.)
Regular Expressions
Direction
Forward
Searches from the current position to the end of the working area.
Backward
Searches from the current position to the beginning of the working area.
Scope
Global
Searches within the entire working area, in the direction specified by the Direction
setting.

Selected text
Searches only within the currently selected text, in the direction specified by the
Direction setting. You can use the mouse or block commands to select a block of text.
Origin
From cursor
The search starts at the cursor's current position, and then proceeds either forward to the
end of the scope, or backward to the beginning of the scope depending on the Direction
setting.
Entire scope
The search covers either the entire block of selected text or the entire script (no matter
where the cursor is in the Editor area) depending upon the Scope options.

12.9 Replace Text dialog

The Replace Text dialog is provided for searching and replacing text within the working
area of SQL Manager editors.
Text to find
Enter a search string in this box. The Arrow-Down button which can be found next to the
input box allows you to select any of the previously entered search strings.
Text to replace
This box allows you to enter a string to replace the search string. The Arrow-Down button
which can be found next to the input box allows you to select any of the previously
entered strings. To replace the search string with an empty string, leave this input box
blank.
Options
Case Sensitive
This option can be used to differentiate uppercase characters from lowercase ones during
the search process.
Whole words only

Use this option to search for words only (with this option off, the search string might be
found within longer words.)
Regular Expressions
Prompt on replace
Check this option if you wish to be prompted before replacing upon each occurrence of
the search string. When this option is off, the search string is replaced automatically.
Direction

Forward
Searches and replaces from the current position to the end of the working area.
Backward
Searches and replaces from the current position to the beginning of the working area.
Scope
Global
Searches and replaces within the entire working area, in the direction specified by the
Direction setting.
Selected text
Searches and replaces only within the currently selected text, in the direction specified
by the Direction setting. You can use the mouse or block commands to select a block of
text.
Origin
From cursor
The search and replace process starts at the cursor's current position, and then proceeds
either forward to the end of the scope, or backward to the beginning of the scope
depending on the Direction setting.
Entire scope
The search and replace process covers either the entire block of selected text or the
entire script (no matter where the cursor is in the Editor area) depending upon the Scope
options.
Click the Replace All button to replace every occurrence of the search string. If you have
checked the Prompt on replace option, the confirmation dialog box appears upon each
occurrence of the search string.

12.10 Format specifiers

The following format specifiers are supported in the format string:
Float/Integer format
0
Digit place holder. If the value being formatted has a digit in the position where the '0'
appears in the format string, then that digit is copied to the output string. Otherwise, a
'0' is stored in that position in the output string.
#
Digit placeholder. If the value being formatted has a digit in the position where the '#'
appears in the format string, then that digit is copied to the output string. Otherwise,
nothing is stored in that position in the output string.
.
Decimal point. The first '.' character in the format string determines the location of the
decimal separator in the formatted value; any additional '.' characters are ignored.
,
Thousand separator. If the format string contains one or more ',' characters, the output
will have thousand separators inserted between each group of three digits to the left of
the decimal point. The placement and number of ',' characters in the format string does
not affect the output, except to indicate that thousand separators are wanted.
E+
Scientific notation. If any of the strings 'E+', 'E-', 'e+', or 'e-' are contained in the format
string, the number is formatted using scientific notation. A group of up to four '0'
characters can immediately follow the 'E+', 'E-', 'e+', or 'e-' to determine the minimum
number of digits in the exponent. The 'E+' and 'e+' formats cause a plus sign to be
output for positive exponents and a minus sign to be output for negative exponents. The
'E-' and 'e-' formats output a sign character only for negative exponents.
Date/Time format
c
Displays the date using the format using the Short Date Format, followed by the time
using the Long Time Format. The time is not displayed if the date-time value indicates
midnight precisely.
d
Displays the day as a number without a leading zero (1-31).
dd
Displays the day as a number with a leading zero (01-31).
ddd
Displays the day as an abbreviation (Sun-Sat) using the strings of the Short Day Names.
dddd

Displays the day as a full name (Sunday-Saturday) using the strings of the Long Day
Names.
ddddd
Displays the date using the Short Date Format.
dddddd
Displays the date using the Long Date Format.
e
Displays the year in the current period/era as a number without a leading zero
(Japanese, Korean and Taiwanese locales only).
ee
Displays the year in the current period/era as a number with a leading zero (Japanese,
Korean and Taiwanese locales only).
g
Displays the period/era as an abbreviation (Japanese and Taiwanese locales only).
gg
Displays the period/era as a full name. (Japanese and Taiwanese locales only).
m
Displays the month as a number without a leading zero (1-12). If the m specifier
immediately follows an h or hh specifier, the minute rather than the month is displayed.
mm
Displays the month as a number with a leading zero (01-12). If the mm specifier
immediately follows an h or hh specifier, the minute rather than the month is displayed.
mmm
Displays the month as an abbreviation (Jan-Dec) using the strings given of the Short
Month Names.
mmmm
Displays the month as a full name (January-December) using the strings of the Long
Month Names.
yy
Displays the year as a two-digit number (00-99).
yyyy
Displays the year as a four-digit number (0000-9999).
h
Displays the hour without a leading zero (0-23).
hh
Displays the hour with a leading zero (00-23).
n
Displays the minute without a leading zero (0-59).

nn
Displays the minute with a leading zero (00-59).
s
Displays the second without a leading zero (0-59).
ss
Displays the second with a leading zero (00-59).
z
Displays the millisecond without a leading zero (0-999).
zzz
Displays the millisecond with a leading zero (000-999).
t
Displays the time using the Short Time Format.
tt
Displays the time using the Long Time Format.
am/pm
Uses the 12-hour clock for the preceding h or hh specifier, and displays 'am' for any hour
before noon, and 'pm' for any hour after noon. The am/pm specifier can use lower,
upper, or mixed case, and the result is displayed accordingly.
a/p
Uses the 12-hour clock for the preceding h or hh specifier, and displays 'a' for any hour
before noon, and 'p' for any hour after noon. The a/p specifier can use lower, upper, or
mixed case, and the result is displayed accordingly.
ampm
Uses the 12-hour clock for the preceding h or hh specifier, and displays the contents of
the TimeAMString global variable for any hour before noon, and the contents of the
TimePMString global variable for any hour after noon.
/
Displays the date separator character using the Date Separator.
:
Displays the time separator character using the Time Separator.
'xx'/"xx"
Characters enclosed in single or double quotes are displayed as-is, and do not affect
formatting.

12.11 Language Info Editor

The Language Info Editor dialog allows you to set the language name and specify the
corresponding *.lng localization file. This dialog is opened when you add or edit a
language (see Environment Options | Localization).
Language Name
The name of the language that is displayed in the Select Program Language dialog and
within the Available Languages list of the Environment Options | Localization section.
Language File
The *.lng file containing the translated string resources. See the
%program_directory%\Languages folder to find already existing localization files.
Adding a language
The Add language dialog allows you to specify your own localization file and set the
language name.
Editing a language
The Edit language dialog allows you to change the language name or select another
localization file for the specified language.

12.12 Using templates

For your convenience the ability to use templates is provided by SQL Manager 2008 for
InterBase/Firebird.
Instead of performing a long chain of routine steps all the time you can save all the
options of the wizard for future use as a template file. Select the Templates | Save
Template drop-down menu item, specify the template file name and set an optional
comment for the template file.
When starting the wizard next time, you can load the template by selecting the
Templates | Load Template drop-down menu item.
Note that saving/loading of templates is possible at any step of the wizard.

12.13 Supported file formats

MS Excel
The most popular e-table format used by Microsoft® Excel (*.xls). The result files are
fully compatible with Microsoft® Excel versions 97-2000, 2003 and XP.
MS Access
File of Microsoft® Access format (*.mdb) with an ADO connection used.
MS Word
One of the most popular text processing formats used by Microsoft® Word (*.doc). The
result files are fully compatible with Microsoft® Word versions 97-2000, 2003 and XP.
RTF
Rich Text Format (*.rtf) supported by many text processing programs (e.g. WordPad).
HTML
Hyper Text Markup Language file format (*.html, *.htm), complete compatibility with
HTML 4.0 specification.
PDF
A standard format in electronic publishing (*.pdf).
Text file
Plain text file format (*.txt).
CSV file
Comma-Separated Value file format (*.csv).
DIF file
Data Interchange File (*.dif) format.
SYLK
Symbolic Links (*.slk) file format.
Note: all the text formats including Text file, CSV, DIF, SYLK are usually used as working
or interchange formats.
LaTeX
A specific file format (*.tex) which is a popular (especially among mathematicians and
physicists) macroextension of TeX pack developed by D.Knut.
XML
A markup language for documents containing structured information (*.xml).
DBF
Database file format (*.dbf)used by dBASE and a number of xBASE applications.
MS Excel 2007
The contemporary e-table format used by Microsoft® Excel 2007 (*.xlsx). The result files
are fully compatible with Microsoft® Excel 2007.

MS Word 2007
The contemporary text processing format used by Microsoft® Word 2007 (*.docx). The
result files are fully compatible with Microsoft® Word 2007.
ODF Spreadsheets
OASIS Open Document Format for Office Applications - open document file format for
spreadsheets (*.ods) used by a number of applications including OpenOffice.org and
KOffice.
ODF text
OASIS Open Document Format for Office Applications - open document file format for
word processing (*.odt) documents used by a number of applications including
OpenOffice.org and KOffice.

12.14 To-Do List

The To-Do List window allows you to make up a list of tasks for the database.
To call this window, select the View | To-Do List main menu item, or use the
Shift+Ctrl+T shortcut.
The task list is displayed in a form of a grid. Its columns (Action, Priority, User, Category)
correspond to the task parameters. Clicking the column caption to sort the task list by
the current parameter or change the sorting direction.
Database
Select the database to apply the task list to. When switching between the databases you
can view different task lists.
To add a task to this list, click the Add Item link of the Navigation bar, or select Add
Item in the context menu. You can also use the Ins key for the same purpose. Define
the task parameters and click OK to add the new task to the list.
Text
Optional text to describe the task.
Priority
Set a numeric value to indicate the priority of the task.
User Name
The database User name this task is applied to.
Category
Set a category for the task. Using categories may be useful for grouping tasks.

To modify a task, select the task in the list and click the Edit Item link of the Navigation
bar, or select Edit Item in the context menu. You can also use the Enter key for the
same purpose.
To remove a task, select the task in the list and click the Delete Item link of the
Navigation bar, or select Delete Item in the context menu. You can also use the Del key
for the same purpose.
To remove all tasks from To-Do List, click the Delete all link of the Navigation bar, or
select Delete all in the context menu. You can also use the Ctrl+Del shortcut for the
same purpose.

12.15 Starting process/Viewing results

At the last step of the Wizard when all necessary options are set, press Finish to begin
the process. The progress and its results will be displayed on screen and, if needed, can
be copied to the clipboard.

12.16 Quick save/Quick load

Quick saving/loading available at the navigation bar in some object editors allows you
to save/load object DDL bypassing standard Save/load dialogs.

12.17 Connection Lost window

When connection loss is detected by SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird the
window like one displayed below appears. You may choose
· whether the program should try to reconnect to the server
or
· just close the database so that it will not be displayed at the explorer tree.

12.18 Customize Toolbars

The Customize Toolbars window allows you to select the buttons displayed on the SQL
Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird toolbars and change their positions.
To call this window, click the down-arrow button at the right-side of any toolbar, then
click Add or Remove Buttons and select Customize.
Toolbars
Toolbars
The toolbars of the window from which the Customize was called. Click a box near the
toolbar name to show or hide the toolbar.
New
Adds a new toolbar to the toolbar list and to the parent window.
Rename
Renames a user-created toolbar.
Delete
Deletes a user-created toolbar.
Commands
This tab allows you to view the list of all the commands available within toolbars of the
parent window. Selecting categories in the Categories list box displays commands of the
selected category (e.g. 'Database' or 'Tools') in the Commands list box. You can pick a
command and drag it on any parent window toolbar to create a button for this command.

Options
Menus show recently used commands first

With this option on the parent window menus drop-down containing only several items
available, which have been used recently. To display full menus unselect this option.
Show full menus after a short delay

This option is available only if Menus show recently used commands first is on. It
displays full menus after a few seconds of showing only recent items.
Reset my usage data

Resets the lists of recently used commands in the toolbars and menus.
Large Icons
Displays larger icons on the parent window toolbars.
Show ToolTips on toolbars

Shows tips on navigating to the toolbar button.
Show shortcut keys in ToolTips

Shows shortcuts for faster activating the corresponding commands in the button tips.
Menu animations
Select how menus appear in the parent window.

Credits
Software Developers:
Dmitry Schastlivtsev
Alexey Butalov
Alexander Zhiltsov
Dmitry Goldobin
Nikita Konyuchenko
Sergey Sviridov
Technical Writers:
Serge Slobodenyuk
Dmitry Doni
Olga Ryabova
Cover Designer:
Tatyana Makurova
Translators:
Anna Shulkina
Serge Fominikh
Team Coordinators:
Dmitry Schastlivtsev
Alexander Chelyadin
Roman Tkachenko

Ibmanager

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ibmanager

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ibmanager

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SQL Manager 2008 for

Document generated on: 24.01.2008

Part I Welcome to SQL Manager for IB/FB! 14

Part II Getting started 52

Part III Database Explorer 70

© 2008 EMS Database Management Solutions

Part IV Database management 96

Part V Database objects management 138

© 2008 EMS Database Management Solutions

© 2008 EMS Database Management Solutions

Part VI Query management tools 254

Part VII Data management 284

© 2008 EMS Database Management Solutions

Part VIII Import/Export Tools 326

© 2008 EMS Database Management Solutions

Merged Cells ................................................................................................................................... 338

Part IX Database tools 388

© 2008 EMS Database Management Solutions

© 2008 EMS Database Management Solutions

Part X Personalization 492

© 2008 EMS Database Management Solutions

Object Editors ......................................................................................................................................... 503

© 2008 EMS Database Management Solutions

Part XI External tools 576

Part XII Appendix 582

© 2008 EMS Database Management Solutions

1 Welcome to SQL Manager for IB/FB!

Visit our web-site for details: http://www.sqlmanager.net/

EMS SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird

· Compatibility of Firebird server versions up to 2.1 and of InterBase server versions up

© 2008 EMS Database Management Solutions

1.1 What's new

What's new in SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird?

© 2008 EMS Database Management Solutions

tables (must be supported by server).

16. External plugin interface is restored.

17. Firebird database alias file support implemented.

27. Improved report building system.

28. Lots of other improvements and bug-fixes.

© 2008 EMS Database Management Solutions

1.2 System requirements

System requirements for SQL Manager 2008 for InterBase/Firebird

· 300-megahertz (MHz) Intel® Pentium II-compatible or faster processor;

© 2008 EMS Database Management Solutions

1.3 Feature Matrix

© 2008 EMS Database Management Solutions

If you want to upgrade an installed copy of SQL Manager 2008 for

© 2008 EMS Database Management Solutions

Product distribution Price

*EMS Maintenance Program provides the following benefits:

© 2008 EMS Database Management Solutions

© 2008 EMS Database Management Solutions

1.6 How to register SQL Manager

© 2008 EMS Database Management Solutions

1.7 License Agreement

IMPORTANT: PLEASE READ THIS AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE

END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

LICENSE OF UNREGISTERED SOFTWARE

LICENSE OF REGISTERED SOFTWARE